4512-987-12131aa - OM Digital v1.5 EN

English
Instructions for Use
DigitalDiagnost system
Version 1.5
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
4512 987 12131 – en
DigitalDiagnost system Version 1.5
4512 987 12131 – en

4512 987 12131 – en

4512 987 12131 – en

4512 987 12131 – en

DigitalDiagnost system
Instructions for Use
Version 1.5
Philips Medical Systems, November 2006
© Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. 2006
Philips Medical Systems is part of Royal All rights are reserved. Reproduction or transmission
in whole or in part, in any form or by any means,
Philips Electronics electronic, mechanical or otherwise, is prohibited
without the prior written consent of the copyright
owner.
www.medical.philips.com
X 0123
This Medical Device meets the provisions of the
transposition of the Medical Device Directive 93/42/
medical@philips.com EEC within the country of the EU Authorized
Representative for the device concerned.
Manufacturing address Copyrights and all other proprietary rights in any
Philips Medical Systems DMC GmbH software and related documentation (“Software”)
made available to you rest exclusively with Philips or
Röntgenstraße 24 its licensors. No title or ownership in the Software is
conferred to you. Use of the Software is subject to the
22335 Hamburg end user license conditions as are available on request.
Germany To the maximum extent permitted by law, you shall

not decompile and/or reverse engineer the software or
any part thereof.
Printed in Germany.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Contents
1 Useful information .......................................... 1-3
1.1 Release ............................................................................... 1-3

1.2 For safe operation .............................................................. 1-3
1.3 Conformity ....................................................................... 1-3
1.4 Training ............................................................................ 1-4
2 Safety ................................................................ 2-3
2.1 About these Instructions for Use ........................................ 2-3

2.2 Electrical safety .................................................................. 2-3
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
2.3 Fire safety .......................................................................... 2-3

2.4 Mechanical safety .............................................................. 2-3
2.5 Electromagnetic compatibility ........................................... 2-4
2.6 Radiation safety ................................................................. 2-5
2.7 The laser light source ......................................................... 2-5
2.8 Disposal ............................................................................. 2-5
2.9 Normal use ........................................................................ 2-6
2.10 Prohibited use ................................................................... 2-7
2.11 In the event of power outage ............................................. 2-8
3 What is DigitalDiagnost? ................................ 3-3

4 Functions .......................................................... 4-3
4.1 Automatic collimation ....................................................... 4-3

4.2 PBL (Positive Beam Limitation) ....................................... 4-3
4.3 Defined exposure positions ................................................ 4-3
4.4 The automatic Bucky (optional) ........................................ 4-4
4.5 The interchangeable grid ................................................... 4-4
4.6 Tomography (optional) ..................................................... 4-4
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Contents 0-5

Contents
4.7 Tracking for the SID (optional) ......................................... 4-4

4.8 Tracking for the image receptor ......................................... 4-8
4.9 The control grip ................................................................ 4-8
4.10 The key-operated switch .................................................... 4-8
4.11 Tomography in combination with tracking ....................... 4-9
4.12 Mode display ..................................................................... 4-9
4.13 Center position .................................................................. 4-9
4.14 The Optimus generators .................................................. 4-10
4.15 Monitoring system for conditions for shutting down
radiography ..................................................................... 4-12
5 Legend .............................................................. 5-3
5.1 The system ........................................................................ 5-3

5.2 PC and peripherals ........................................................... 5-4
5.3 The ceiling suspension units BuckyDiagnost CS2/4 .......... 5-6
5.4 The control grip of the automatic collimator ..................... 5-8
5.5 The control grip of the manual collimator ....................... 5-10
5.7 The vertical Bucky BuckyDiagnost VS ............................ 5-13
5.8 The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact ......... 5-23
5.9 The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM (horizontal) ............ 5-29
5.10 The mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS ...................... 5-34
5.11 The patient tables DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF ................... 5-35
5.12 The patient table Single Sided Table TH-S ..................... 5-38
5.13 The patient transport table Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M
......................................................................................... 5-39
5.14 The patient transport table TRAUMOB X ...................... 5-40
5.15 The plate reader DigitalDiagnost Compano .................... 5-40
5.16 The plate readers S and S Plus ......................................... 5-42
6 The screen layouts .......................................... 6-3
6.1 What you should know about the structure of the screen
layouts ............................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Start window ..................................................................... 6-4
6.3 Patient list ......................................................................... 6-5
6.4 DICOM RIS query ........................................................... 6-8
0-6 Contents DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

Contents
6.5 Examination list ................................................................ 6-9

6.6 Select additional examination .......................................... 6-12
6.7 Control image ................................................................. 6-14
6.8 Functions for image manipulation ................................... 6-16
6.9 Opening examination ...................................................... 6-18
6.10 Selecting .......................................................................... 6-19
6.11 Sorted by ......................................................................... 6-21
6.12 Input screen ..................................................................... 6-22
6.13 Selecting gender ............................................................... 6-24
6.14 Selecting anatomical group .............................................. 6-25
6.15 Selecting examination ...................................................... 6-26
6.16 Scheduled examinations ................................................... 6-27
6.17 Change ............................................................................ 6-28
6.18 Emergency ....................................................................... 6-30
6.19 Viewing patient images .................................................... 6-32
6.20 Displaying image (classic) ................................................ 6-35
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
6.21 Displaying image + menu ................................................ 6-39

6.22 Displaying image (UNIQUE) ......................................... 6-41
6.23 Semi-automatic mode (UNIQUE) .................................. 6-43
6.23.1 UNIQUE – Standard settings ........................... 6-43
6.23.2 UNIQUE – Expert settings .............................. 6-45
6.24 Image processing screen ................................................... 6-48
6.25 Storage medium .............................................................. 6-50
6.26 Print ................................................................................ 6-52
6.27 Hard copy unit calibration .............................................. 6-60
6.28 System menu ................................................................... 6-62
6.29 Service tools ..................................................................... 6-63
6.30 Clinical quality control – Exposure statistics .................... 6-63
6.31 Clinical quality control – Exposure data .......................... 6-66
7 Operation ........................................................ 7-5
7.1 The system ........................................................................ 7-5

7.1.1 For your guidance ............................................... 7-5
7.1.2 Switch on system ................................................ 7-5
7.1.3 Logging on ......................................................... 7-6
7.1.4 Switching off system ........................................... 7-7
7.1.5 Entering patient data .......................................... 7-8
7.1.6 Select patient .................................................... 7-11
7.1.7 Starting examination ......................................... 7-11

Contents
7.1.8 Selecting tube assembly ..................................... 7-11

7.1.9 Positioning tube assembly ................................. 7-13
7.1.10 Positioning patient ............................................ 7-13
7.1.11 Adjusting exposure data, if necessary ................. 7-14
7.1.12 Releasing an exposure ....................................... 7-15
7.1.13 Adjusting control image .................................... 7-15
7.1.14 Making next exposure without immediate
confirmation ..................................................... 7-16
7.1.15 Making control images ..................................... 7-17
7.1.16 Repeating exposure ........................................... 7-17
7.1.17 After exposure ................................................... 7-18
7.1.18 Calling up patient data according to search criteria
.......................................................................... 7-18
7.1.19 Modifying input data ........................................ 7-20
7.1.20 Deleting patient data ........................................ 7-21
7.1.21 With an emergency ........................................... 7-22
7.1.22 Handling images ............................................... 7-23
7.1.23 Calibrating monitor .......................................... 7-38
7.1.24 Calibrating detector .......................................... 7-40
7.1.25 Calibrating laser printer .................................... 7-42
7.1.26 Printing ............................................................ 7-46
7.1.27 Stitching ........................................................... 7-57
7.1.28 Digital cassette exposures .................................. 7-71
7.1.29 Clinical quality control ..................................... 7-73
7.2 The BuckyDiagnost CS 2/4 ceiling suspension units ....... 7-77
7.2.1 Movements ....................................................... 7-77
7.2.2 Tips to easily position the tube assembly with the
control grip ....................................................... 7-80
7.3 The manual collimator .................................................... 7-81
7.3.1 Selecting added filters ....................................... 7-81
7.3.2 Measuring the SID ........................................... 7-81
7.3.3 Collimating ...................................................... 7-81
7.4 The automatic collimator ................................................ 7-82
7.4.1 Cassette size sensing .......................................... 7-82
7.4.3 SID display ....................................................... 7-84
7.4.4 Collimating ...................................................... 7-86
7.5 The extended collimator .................................................. 7-87
7.5.1 Select auxiliary .................................................. 7-87
7.5.2 Select APR program .......................................... 7-88
7.6.1 Operation of all configurations ......................... 7-88

7.6.2 Operation of the basic configuration ................. 7-89
7.6.3 Operation with AEC, without APR .................. 7-91
7.6.4 Operation with APR, without AEC .................. 7-93
7.6.5 APR records ...................................................... 7-93
7.6.6 Operation with AEC and APR ......................... 7-97
7.6.7 Tomography ................................................... 7-102
7.6.8 The dose display ............................................. 7-106
7.7 The vertical Bucky BuckyDiagnost VS .......................... 7-107
7.7.1 Moving unit ................................................... 7-107
7.7.2 Changing a grid .............................................. 7-111

Contents
7.7.3 Changing a cassette ......................................... 7-113

7.7.4 The stretch grip .............................................. 7-115
7.7.5 Positioning patient .......................................... 7-116
7.7.6 Collimating .................................................... 7-117
7.8 The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact ....... 7-118
7.8.1 Moving unit ................................................... 7-118
7.8.2 Changing a grid .............................................. 7-123
7.8.3 The stretch grip .............................................. 7-125
7.8.5 Collimating .................................................... 7-127
7.9 The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM (horizontal) .......... 7-128
7.9.1 Moving unit ................................................... 7-128
7.9.2 Changing a grid .............................................. 7-134
7.9.3 The stretch grip .............................................. 7-136
7.9.5 Collimating .................................................... 7-138
7.10 The mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS .................... 7-139
7.10.1 Movements ..................................................... 7-139
7.11 The patient tables DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF ................. 7-142
7.11.1 For your guidance ........................................... 7-142
7.11.2 Moving the table top ...................................... 7-142
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.11.3 Adjusting SID and collimating with Bucky

exposures ........................................................ 7-143
7.11.4 Cassette size sensing ........................................ 7-144
7.11.5 Inserting and removing a cassette .................... 7-145
7.11.6 Changing a grid .............................................. 7-147
7.11.7 Setting center position .................................... 7-149
7.12 The patient table Single Sided Table TH-S ................... 7-149
7.12.1 Safety instructions ........................................... 7-149
7.12.3 Other functions .............................................. 7-150
7.12.4 In the event of a collision ................................ 7-151
....................................................................................... 7-151
7.13.1 Safety precautions ........................................... 7-151
7.13.2 Applying/releasing brakes ............................... 7-151
7.13.3 Moving unit ................................................... 7-152
7.14 The patient transport table TRAUMOB X .................... 7-153
7.14.1 Please bear the following in mind when positioning the
patient ............................................................ 7-153
7.14.2 Inserting table top ........................................... 7-153

7.14.3 Moving unit ................................................... 7-153
7.14.4 Operating brakes ............................................ 7-154
7.14.5 Raising/lowering table top .............................. 7-154
7.15 The plate reader DigitalDiagnost Compano .................. 7-155
7.15.1 Switching ON/OFF ........................................ 7-155
7.15.2 Reading out image plate ................................. 7-157
7.15.3 Performing secondary erasure ......................... 7-161
7.15.4 Performing primary erasure ........................... 7-161
7.16 The plate readers S and S Plus ....................................... 7-162
7.16.1 Switching ON/OFF ........................................ 7-162

Contents

7.16.4 Performing primary erasure ............................ 7-170
7.17 Exposures with plate cassettes ........................................ 7-172
7.17.1 Exposure parameters ....................................... 7-172
7.17.2 Positioning the cassette ................................... 7-172
7.17.3 Handling cassettes and image plates ................ 7-174
7.18 Tracking ........................................................................ 7-175
7.18.1 Tracking for the SID ...................................... 7-175
7.18.2 Tracking for the image receptor ...................... 7-176
7.18.3 Changing auxiliaries ........................................ 7-176
8 Maintenance .................................................... 8-3
8.1 Obligations of the user ...................................................... 8-3

8.2 Safety checks according to the Medical Device Directive
........................................................................................... 8-3
8.3 Tests by the user ................................................................ 8-3
9 Maintenance .................................................... 9-3
9.1 Repairs .............................................................................. 9-3

9.2 Logging ............................................................................. 9-3
9.3 Disinfection ....................................................................... 9-3
9.4 Cleaning ............................................................................ 9-4
9.4.1 Cleaning the system ............................................ 9-4
9.4.2 Cleaning the plate reader .................................... 9-4
9.4.3 Cleaning the image plates ................................... 9-7
10 Technical data ............................................... 10-3
10.1 System ............................................................................. 10-3

10.2 BuckyDiagnost CS2/4 ..................................................... 10-3
10.2.1 Equipment data ................................................ 10-3

10.2.2 Compatibility ................................................... 10-4
10.2.3 Labels ............................................................... 10-5
10.3 Optimus 50/65/80 .......................................................... 10-6
10.3.1 Electrical data ................................................... 10-6
10.3.2 Setting ranges ................................................... 10-8
10.3.3 Accuracy of the operating data, tolerances
.......................................................................... 10-8
10.3.4 Compatibility ................................................. 10-10
10.3.5 Labels ............................................................. 10-10

Contents
10.4 BuckyDiagnost VS ........................................................ 10-11

10.4.1 Compatibility ................................................. 10-11
10.4.2 Equipment data .............................................. 10-11
10.4.3 Options .......................................................... 10-13
10.4.4 Usable SID, depending on grid data ............... 10-13
10.4.5 Labels ............................................................. 10-14
10.5 DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact/VM (horizontal)
....................................................................................... 10-15
10.5.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-15
10.5.2 Compatibility ................................................. 10-16
10.5.3 Options .......................................................... 10-17
10.5.4 Labels ............................................................. 10-17
10.6 BuckyDiagnost FS ......................................................... 10-18
10.6.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-18
10.6.2 Compatibility ................................................. 10-19
10.6.3 Labels ............................................................. 10-20
10.7 DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF .............................................. 10-21
10.7.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-21
10.7.2 Compatibility ................................................. 10-21
10.7.3 Labels ............................................................. 10-22
10.8 Single Sided Table TH-S ............................................... 10-23
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
10.8.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-23

10.8.2 Labels ............................................................. 10-23
10.9 Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M .................................. 10-24
10.9.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-24
10.9.2 Compatibility ................................................. 10-24
10.9.3 Labels ............................................................. 10-24
10.10 TRAUMOB X .............................................................. 10-25
10.10.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-25
10.10.2 Compatibility ................................................. 10-25
10.10.3 Labels ............................................................. 10-25
10.11 Stitching accessories ....................................................... 10-26
10.11.1 Patient carriage ............................................... 10-26
10.11.2 Shutters .......................................................... 10-28
10.12 Compano ...................................................................... 10-28
10.12.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-28
10.12.2 Labels ............................................................. 10-29
10.13.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-30
10.13.2 Labels ............................................................. 10-31

10.14 Electromagnetic compatibility data ................................ 10-31
10.14.1 Electromagnetic interference immunity –
recommended safety distances ......................... 10-31
10.14.2 Electromagnetic emission ................................ 10-32

Contents
11 Annex ............................................................. 11-3
11.1 Glossary of terms ............................................................. 11-3

11.2 Messages on the monitor ................................................. 11-7
11.3 Messages in control grip display ....................................... 11-9
11.4 Messages in generator control desk display .................... 11-11
11.5 Screen-film combinations .............................................. 11-12
11.6 If the system is not ready for exposure ........................... 11-12
11.7 Exposure table ............................................................... 11-12
11.8 Button symbols and their meaning ................................ 11-15
11.9 Switching off the system – in a few words ...................... 11-17
11.10 The hierarchy of levels on the display ............................ 11-17
11.11 Symbols for image processing ........................................ 11-19
11.12 The dose indicator ......................................................... 11-19
11.13 Energy characteristic ...................................................... 11-22
11.14 Reproduction scale ........................................................ 11-22
11.15 Erasure .......................................................................... 11-23
12 Accessories .................................................... 12-5
12.1 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT ............. 12-5

12.1.1 Normal use ....................................................... 12-5
12.1.2 Prohibited use ................................................... 12-5
12.1.3 Legend .............................................................. 12-6
12.1.4 Installing ........................................................... 12-6
12.1.5 Dismantling ...................................................... 12-7
12.1.6 Inserting and positioning a cassette ................... 12-9
12.1.7 Removing a cassette ........................................ 12-10
12.1.8 Technical data ................................................ 12-10
12.1.9 Compatibility ................................................. 12-10
12.1.10 Labels ............................................................. 12-11
12.2 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS .................. 12-11
12.2.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-11

12.2.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-11
12.2.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-12
12.2.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-12
12.2.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-13
12.2.6 Inserting and positioning a cassette ................. 12-15
12.2.8 Technical data ................................................ 12-16
12.2.9 Compatibility ................................................. 12-16
12.2.10 Labels ............................................................. 12-17

Contents
12.3 Long cassette holder ...................................................... 12-17

12.3.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-17
12.3.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-17
12.3.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-18
12.3.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-18
12.3.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-19
12.3.6 Inserting a cassette .......................................... 12-20
12.3.8 Technical data ................................................ 12-21
12.3.9 Compatibility ................................................. 12-21
12.3.10 Labels ............................................................. 12-21
12.4 Handrail ........................................................................ 12-22
12.4.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-22
12.4.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-22
12.4.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-22
12.4.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-22
12.4.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-23
12.4.6 Technical data ................................................ 12-23
12.4.7 Compatibility ................................................. 12-23
12.4.8 Labels ............................................................. 12-23
12.5 Fixing aid ...................................................................... 12-24
12.5.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-24
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12.5.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-24

12.5.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-24
12.5.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-25
12.5.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-25
12.5.6 Operation ....................................................... 12-25
12.5.7 Technical data ................................................ 12-25
12.5.8 Compatibility ................................................. 12-25
12.5.9 Labels ............................................................. 12-26
12.6 Infusion bottle holder .................................................... 12-26
12.6.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-26
12.6.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-26
12.6.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-27
12.6.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-27
12.6.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-27
12.6.6 Technical data ................................................ 12-28
12.6.7 Compatibility ................................................. 12-28
12.6.8 Labels ............................................................. 12-28
12.7 Paper roll holder ............................................................ 12-28
12.7.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-28
12.7.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-28

12.7.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-29
12.7.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-29
12.7.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-30
12.7.6 Technical data ................................................ 12-30
12.7.7 Compatibility ................................................. 12-30
12.7.8 Labels ............................................................. 12-30
12.8 Stretch grip for BuckyDiagnost VS basic ....................... 12-31
12.8.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-31
12.8.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-31
12.8.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-31

Contents
12.8.4 Operating ....................................................... 12-32

12.8.5 Technical data ................................................ 12-32
12.8.6 Compatibility ................................................. 12-32
12.8.7 Labels ............................................................. 12-32
12.9 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4
....................................................................................... 12-33
12.9.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-33
12.9.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-33
12.9.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-33
12.9.4 Operating ....................................................... 12-34
12.9.5 Technical data ................................................ 12-34
12.9.6 Compatibility ................................................. 12-34
12.9.7 Labels ............................................................. 12-35
12.10 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS .............................. 12-35
12.10.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-35
12.10.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-35
12.10.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-36
12.10.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-36
12.10.5 Operating ....................................................... 12-37
12.10.6 Technical data ................................................ 12-37
12.10.7 Compatibility ................................................. 12-37
12.10.8 Labels ............................................................. 12-38
12.11 Table top support .......................................................... 12-38
12.11.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-38
12.11.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-38
12.11.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-39
12.11.4 Operating ....................................................... 12-39
12.11.5 Technical data ................................................ 12-39
12.11.6 Compatibility ................................................. 12-40
12.11.7 Labels ............................................................. 12-40

Contents
1 Useful information .......................................... 1-3
1.1 Release ............................................................................... 1-3

1.2 For safe operation .............................................................. 1-3
1.3 Conformity ....................................................................... 1-3
1.4 Training ............................................................................ 1-4
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

Contents

1 Useful information
1.1 Release
These Instructions for Use correspond to the latest release of the X-ray
equipment at the time of going to press.
There are different possible configurations for this equipment. These
Instructions for Use describe the largest possible configuration. It is
therefore possible that functions (indicated as optional) are described
which do not form part of your unit.
1.2 For safe operation

• If the user wishes to connect the X-ray equipment to equipment,
components or assemblies other than those described in the section
"Compatability" and if it is not apparent from the technical data
whether it can be safely combined with such equipment, compo-
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
nents or assemblies, the user must consult the manufacturers con-

cerned or an expert to ensure that the safety of the patient, operating
staff and the environment is not affected by the intended combina-
tion.
• Philips only accepts responsibility for the safety features of its prod-
ucts if maintenance, repairs and modifications are performed by
Philips or persons explicitly authorized to do so by Philips.
• As with any technical appliance, this X-ray equipment also calls for
proper operation and regular, competent maintenance and care,
which are described in the section "Maintenance".
• If you operate the X-ray equipment incorrectly or if the user fails to
maintain it properly, Philips cannot be held liable for any resulting
faults, damage or injuries.
• Safety circuits may be neither removed nor modified.
• You may only remove or open parts of the housing if you are in-
structed to do so by the Instructions for use.
• After use please remove the key.
1.3 Conformity
This Medical Device meets the provisions of the Medical Device Di-
rective MDD 93/42 EEC (93).
If you have further questions regarding the applicable national or in-
ternational standards, please address them to:
Philips Medical Systems DMC GmbH
Quality Assurance Department
Roentgenstrasse 24
22335 Hamburg
Fax: (+49) 40/5078-2147
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Useful information 1-3

1.4 Training
1.4 Training
The X-ray equipment may only be operated by persons who have the
necessary expertise in radiation protection or knowledge of radiation
protection and who have been instructed in how to operate the X-ray
equipment.
1-4 Useful information DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

Contents
2 Safety ................................................................ 2-3
2.1 About these Instructions for Use ........................................ 2-3

2.2 Electrical safety .................................................................. 2-3
2.3 Fire safety .......................................................................... 2-3
2.4 Mechanical safety .............................................................. 2-3
2.5 Electromagnetic compatibility ........................................... 2-4
2.6 Radiation safety ................................................................. 2-5
2.7 The laser light source ......................................................... 2-5
2.8 Disposal ............................................................................. 2-5
2.9 Normal use ........................................................................ 2-6
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
2.10 Prohibited use ................................................................... 2-7

2.11 In the event of power outage ............................................. 2-8

Contents

2 Safety
2.1 About these Instructions for Use

These Instructions for Use are designed to make it possible for you to
work with the X-ray equipment described safely. You may operate the
X-ray equipment only in compliance with the safety instructions in these
Instructions for Use and not use it for purposes other than for which it
is intended.
It is always the user who is responsible for compliance with the regula-
tions applying to installation and operation of X-ray equipment.
2.2 Electrical safety

This X-ray equipment complies with safety class I (IEC 60601-1).
Only trained maintenance staff may remove the covers from the high-
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
voltage cable of the X-ray tube assembly and the high-voltage generator.
This X-ray equipment may only be operated in medical rooms which
meet IEC requirements.
▪ You must never operate this X-ray equipment in areas where there is a risk
of explosion.
▪ Detergents and disinfectants, including those used on patients, may create
explosive mixtures of gases. Please observe the relevant regulations.
DANGER
2.3 Fire safety
▪ Only use extinguishers on electrical or chemical fires which are specifically

labeled for those purposes. Any attempt to extinguish electrical fires with wa-
ter or other liquids can result in serious personal injury.
DANGER
▪ The air vents may not be covered when the device is switched on.
2.4 Mechanical safety
▪ Please ensure that neither the patient nor yourself allows hands to enter the
range of movement of the X-ray equipment and that no parts of clothing can
be caught by it.
CAUTION
▪ Remove all objects from the range of movement of the X-ray equipment.
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Safety 2-3

2.5 Electromagnetic compatibility
2.5 Electromagnetic compatibility

In accordance with its intended use, this apparatus complies with the
law governing EMC, which defines the permitted emission levels from
electronic equipment and its required immunity against electromag-
netic fields.
Nevertheless, it is not possible to exclude with absolute certainty the
possibility that radio signals from high-frequency transmitters, e.g. cell
phones or similar mobile radio equipment, which themselves conform
to the EMC regulations, may influence the proper functioning of elec-
tromedical apparatus if such equipment is operated in close proximity
and with relatively high transmission power. Therefore, operation of
such radio equipment in the immediate vicinity of electronically con-
trolled medical apparatus should be avoided to eliminate any risk of
interference.
Explanation:
Electronic apparatus that satisfies the EMC requirements is designed so
that under normal conditions there is no risk of malfunction caused by
electromagnetic interference. However, in the case of radio signals from
high-frequency transmitters with a relatively high transmitting power,
the risk of electromagnetic incompatibility when operated in close prox-
imity to the equipment cannot be totally ruled out.
In unusual circumstances unintended functions of the apparatus could
be initiated, possibly giving rise to undesirable risks for the patient or
user.
For this reason, all kinds of transmission with mobile radio equipment
should be avoided. This also applies when the apparatus is in "standby"
mode.
Mobile telephones must be switched off in designated problem zones.
2-4 Safety DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

Radiation safety 2.6
2.6 Radiation safety
Ensure that before performing any fluoroscopy or radiography all the necessary
radiation protection measures have been taken.
Personnel in the examination room must comply with the valid radiation protec-
tion regulations when using X-rays. Please comply with the following rules:
CAUTION
▪ To protect the patient against radiation always use radiation protection ac-
cessories in addition to devices which are fitted to the X-ray equipment (e.g.
collimator, spacer, filter).
▪ Wear protective clothing. Radiation protection aprons with a lead equivalent
of 0.35 mm attenuate X-radiation at 50 kV by 99.84%, and at 100 kV by 91.2%
(DIN 6815).
▪ Always use the smallest X-ray beam collimation. Scattered radiation is largely
dependent on the volume of the object being exposed.
▪ Wear a personal dosemeter if you have to be in the controlled area occasion-
ally. Philips recommends determining the personal dose occurring at the
workplace under practical conditions and using it as the basis for radiation
precautions.
▪ Always select the largest possible focal spot to skin distance to keep the ab-
sorbed dose for the patient as low as could reasonably be possible.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▪ Always be aware that any material brought into the path of radiation between
the patient and the image receptor will have a negative influence on the image
quality as well as increase the patient dose.
▪ Ensure that acoustic and visual communication is established between user
and patient even during exposure, if necessary, by technical means (for in-
stance an intercom).
▪ Safety circuits which may prevent X-radiation from being switched on under
certain conditions may be neither removed nor modified.
2.7 The laser light source

The laser is a Class 2 device. Make sure that no-one looks directly into
the light beam.
With Class 2 lasers, the eye is protected by the eyelid closure reflex in
the event of accidental, brief glances into the laser beam. Class 2 lasers
Laser aperture
may therefore be used without taking any further precautions, provided
that it is not necessary to either look into the beam intentionally for
longer than 0.25 s or to repeatedly look into the laser beam or directly
reflected beam. For continuous-duty Class 2 lasers the maximum limit
for accessible radiation is 1 mW.
2.8 Disposal
Take-back, proper disposal and recovery of the Medical Device take
place in accordance with the European WEEE Directive (Waste Elec-
trical and Electronic Equipment) and/or respective requirements of
national legislation.
Philips manufactures state-of-the-art X-ray equipment in terms of safety
and environmental protection. Assuming no parts of the system housing

2.9 Normal use
are opened and assuming the system is used properly there are no risks
to persons or the environment.
To comply with regulations it is necessary to use materials which may
be harmful to the environment and therefore have to be disposed of in
a proper manner.
For this reason you must not dispose of the X-ray equipment to-
gether with normal industrial or domestic waste.
Philips
• supports you in disposing of the X-ray equipment described in a
proper manner,
• returns reusable parts to the production cycle via certified disposal
companies and
• thus helps to reduce environmental pollution.
Please contact the Philips Customer Service in full confidence.
2.9 Normal use

The BuckyDiagnost CS columns (tube carriers) are used for making X-
ray exposures on a patient table or at a vertical Bucky, for example.
The tables DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF and Single Sided Table TH-S are
patient tables for supporting and positioning a patient in the radiation
field of an X-ray system.
The BuckyDiagnost FS and BuckyDiagnost VS wall Buckys are for
making X-ray exposures – preferably with horizontal and oblique radi-
ation beam – on patients in the standing, seated or lying position. They
contain the image receptor (cassette).
The DigitalDiagnost VM is a multifunctional radiographic device for
making X-ray exposures on patients in the standing, seated or lying
position. It is intended for use with the Single Sided Table TH-S, Dig-
italDiagnost TH2/TF or the Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M.
The patient transport tables TRAUMOB X and Height Adjustable
Trolley TA-M with radiolucent table top are used for
• moving patients comfortably from the ambulance into ER or to the
bed,
• moving patients within the hospital and for attending to emergen-
cies,
• positioning the patient for fluoroscopy with the C-arm,
• making X-ray exposures.
The Optimus generators are converter generators controlled by micro-

processors. The basic version consists of a control desk and standard
housing with automatic control and high voltage generator. The control
desk is available without Anatomical Programmed Radiography (APR)
and Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) as well as with APR and/or
AEC.
The DigitalDiagnost Compano plate reader and S und S Plus are used
to read out the image plates exposed with the cassette technique as some
views may not be directly possible with the digital detector.
The patient data printer is used to record and print out patient data.

Prohibited use 2.10
2.10 Prohibited use

• The system is not suitable for breathing studies.
• For safety reasons two patients must not remain in the examination
room at the same time.
• You must never use the monitor as a diagnostic station.
• With free exposure do not point the X-ray beam directly at the de-
tector.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
• You must never use the horizontal detector as a seat or shelf.

• When making exposures in the seated position the patient must
never stretch his or her legs under the tilted detector.
• The patient must not hang from the stretch grip.
• You must never use the tube assembly to support the extremities.
You must not use the patient transport tables TRAUMOB X or Height
Adjustable Trolley TA-M for the following purposes or under the fol-
lowing conditions:
• in rooms with magnetic resonance systems
• for moving patients outside buildings

2.11 In the event of power outage
• for supporting patients long-term

• for supporting unconscious patients or patients who are not in con-
trol of themselves without constant supervision
• for loads in excess of 135 kg.
With the Optimus generators you can make diagnostic X-ray exposures
within the scope of their technical data and descriptions.
2.11 In the event of power outage

In the event of power outage X-ray exposures are not possible.
Please note:
• Patients may only be supported and positioned when the system is
ready for operation again.
• Patients lying on the table top should remain there until the system
is ready for operation again.
If this is not possible,
˗ move the table top on one side to the stops,
˗ hold the table top steady when the patient is leaving it. Without
power the table top is freely movable and in small rooms could
block e.g. a passage for a trolley or the door of a cubicle.

Contents
3 What is DigitalDiagnost? ................................ 3-3

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

Contents

3 What is DigitalDiagnost?
DigitalDiagnost is the generic term for several components of a family

of devices that can be put together in various constellations to form X-
ray systems.
These Instructions for Use describe the following components:
• the basic system
• the BuckyDiagnost CS ceiling suspension unit
• the control grips
• the X-ray generators Optimus 50/65/80
• the Bucky stand DigitalDiagnost VS
• the radiographic device DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact
• the radiographic device DigitalDiagnost VM (horizontal)
• the mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS.
• the patient tables DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF
• the patient table Single Sided Table TH-S
• the patient table Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M
• the patient transport table TRAUMOB X
• the plate reader DigitalDiagnost Compano
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
• the plate readers S and S Plus

• radiographic accessories
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 What is DigitalDiagnost? 3-3

3
3-4 What is DigitalDiagnost? DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

Contents
4 Functions .......................................................... 4-3
4.1 Automatic collimation ....................................................... 4-3

4.2 PBL (Positive Beam Limitation) ....................................... 4-3
4.3 Defined exposure positions ................................................ 4-3
4.4 The automatic Bucky (optional) ........................................ 4-4
4.5 The interchangeable grid ................................................... 4-4
4.6 Tomography (optional) ..................................................... 4-4
4.7 Tracking for the SID (optional) ......................................... 4-4
4.8 Tracking for the image receptor ......................................... 4-8
4.9 The control grip ................................................................ 4-8
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
4.10 The key-operated switch .................................................... 4-8

4.11 Tomography in combination with tracking ....................... 4-9
4.12 Mode display ..................................................................... 4-9
4.13 Center position .................................................................. 4-9
4.15 Monitoring system for conditions for shutting down
radiography ..................................................................... 4-12

Contents

4 Functions
4.1 Automatic collimation

This consists of
• the automatic collimator,
• a Bucky with cassette size detection and
• the extended control grip.
If all the components are at a defined exposure position, the system

detects the size of a cassette inserted and sets the collimator accordingly.
4.2 PBL (Positive Beam Limitation)

With a manual collimator, the radiation field changes with the SID
(source-image distance). With an automatic collimator, the size of the
radiation field – including the field collimated manually – is re-
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
tained when the SID changes.

If you change the SID by more than 2 cm with PBL after manual col-
limation, collimation to the cassette size takes place again. This function
can be deactivated by Customer Service.
With automatic collimation it is not possible to expose beyond the size
of the cassette.
4.3 Defined exposure positions

Thanks to the "floating" table top, it only requires one movement to
position the patient in the radiation beam axis, which is faster than
moving both the tube assembly and the Bucky carriage. This system is
therefore designed for the center position of the tube assembly and im-
age receptor. You only have to move the Bucky carriage out of the center
position for a few exposures (e.g. foot).
For more convenient working, Customer Service can set several defined
exposure positions according to the space available. In these exposure
positions the LEDs on the control grip light up and display the locked-
in status.
• At the patient table:
- Bucky carriage in the center position (automatic collimation op-
erates throughout the entire range of movement)
- tube assembly in the center position (longitudinally and trans-
versely locked-in) or only transversely locked-in or only longitudi-
nally locked-in (the automatic Bucky does not lock in place)
- tube assembly at preferred SID (automatic collimation operates
throughout the entire setting range)
- vertical radiation beam axis.
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Functions 4-3

4.4 The automatic Bucky (optional)
Additionally, in the case of tomography:

- table height in tomographic position with BuckyDiagnost TH2 (start-
ing position for the tomographic height)
- tomographic height.
• At the vertical Bucky: horizontal radiation beam axis
- locked at SID (several SIDs are possible)
vertical radiation beam axis
- tube assembly in the center position (longitudinally and trans-
versely locked-in)
- with automatic collimation, positioning plate for the defined SID
in the lower position (set by Customer Service)
- tube assembly at preferred SID.
• Parking position
- e.g. enables the undertable tube assembly in a fluoroscopy unit.
4.4 The automatic Bucky (optional)

The motorized cassette transport allows you to conveniently insert and
remove the cassette. The Bucky senses the size of the cassette inserted.
This information is used with the "Automatic sensing" option.
4.5 The interchangeable grid

You can change or remove the grid and thus optimally adjust the ex-
posure conditions to the object.
4.6 Tomography (optional)

On the linear tomography unit without coupling rod you can collimate
manually or automatically. For more convenient operation, the longi-
tudinal and swivel movement of the tube assembly and Bucky carriage
movement are servo-assisted. The tomography parameters can be se-
lected on the extended control grip.
4.7 Tracking for the SID (optional)

Tracking is only possible in conjunction with automatic collimation. It
means the tube assembly and positioning plate of the vertical Bucky or
the tube assembly and table top are synchronized during vertical move-
ment. According to its purpose, you can use the tracking function when
you are working with the BuckyDiagnost VE/VT auxiliary. On the
BuckyDiagnost TF you can only use the tracking function on the table
for setting the SID.
What you ought to know about tracking
• The tracking function can only be activated if
- the system components are in a defined exposure position,
4-4 Functions DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

Tracking for the SID (optional) 4.7
- the tube assembly is at 0° or 90°,

- the cassette has been inserted centrally.
• Tracking is protected against collisions. If the tube assembly meets
an obstacle, it stops when a certain force is exceeded. Then it moves
back slightly.
• The SID remains the same when you change the height of the table
top or positioning plate under the following conditions:
- table top horizontal,
- positioning plate of vertical Bucky horizontal,
- radiation beam axis vertical.
On DigitalDiagnost TH2
X X
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The SID (X) remains constant.

On DigitalDiagnost TF
X X

4.7 Tracking for the SID (optional)
For tomography, the tracking is adapted to tomography conditions. Set

SID (X).
On BuckyDiagnost CS
Tracking with a horizontal radiation beam axis;

left: centered
right: off-center
On BuckyDiagnost FS
Tracking with a horizontal radiation beam axis;

left: centered
right: off-center

Tracking for the SID (optional) 4.7
On BuckyDiagnost VS with tilting feature
X X
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The SID (X) remains constant.

The vertical Bucky
• If the cassette has been centered when inserting, the tube assembly
will follow so that the radiation beam hits the center of the cassette.
• If a portrait format cassette of at least 24 cm x 30 cm is off-center
when inserted, the tube assembly will follow so that the top edge of
the collimated field remains the same for manual collimation. With
BuckyDiagnost VS, the off-center bottom position is also possible.
• With portrait format cassettes of less than 24 cm x 30 cm, off-center
collimation is not possible.
• If the X-ray unit is not vertical when the radiation beam is horizontal,
the tracking function is deactivated. The display on the control grip
shows "Wall stand tilted".
If the Bucky unit is horizontal and the radiation beam axis is vertical,
the SID is retained when you change the height of the Bucky unit.
The capture range
All the messages appear on the control grip display.
• The "Tracking ready" message indicates that for the auxiliary selected
you can use the tracking function but the tube assembly is still far
away from the exposure position. So that you do not have to move
the tube assembly to the exact exposure position manually, there is
a "capture range". As soon as the tube assembly is in the capture
range, it is moved to the exact exposure position automatically.
• The capture range is above and below the set SID or the level of the
radiation beam axis if the beam is horizontal. You can activate the
tracking function by manually moving the tube assembly into the
vicinity of the SID or the level of the radiation beam axis if the beam
is horizontal, i.e. into the capture range. If you then let go of the
button to enable tube assembly movements, the tracking function is

4.8 Tracking for the image receptor
activated and moves the tube assembly to the preset SID or to the
level of the cassette if the radiation beam is horizontal.
• The capture range is set by Customer Service.
• Outside the capture range work is manual.
• In the case of "free" exposures with a vertical radiation beam axis you
measure the source-image (or cassette) distance with the tape meas-
ure. The tracking function then moves the tube assembly to your
preferred height.
4.8 Tracking for the image receptor

(optional, part of the "Automatic collimator" and "Tomography" com-
bination)
In combination with tomography, you can carry out motorized move-
ment of the Bucky carriage (center of image receptor) into the radiation
beam axis. The system collimates automatically.
The tracking for the image receptor only functions in systems with to-
mography and function enabled by Customer Service.
Precondition:
• after switching on, you have to move the ceiling suspension unit into
the center position (locked-in longitudinally and transversely)
• the radiation beam axis is vertical
• the tube assembly is locked-in transversely if a grid is inserted
4.9 The control grip

(extended version, part of the "Automatic collimation" and "Tomog-
raphy" options)
The extended version of the control grip is designed for the maximum
system configuration, so that some controls and displays have no func-
tion if the corresponding option is not installed in the system.
With the extended version you can use Test to call up a help text on the
display in the event that you do not receive a ready-for-exposure signal.
Some texts are only of importance for Customer Service. They are
marked accordingly. You will find a list of help texts in the appendix.
4.10 The key-operated switch

(part of the "Automatic collimation" option )

You use the key-operated switch to switch
• the cassette size sensing device off,
• switch the automatic collimation off and
• switch the system over to manual operation.

Tomography in combination with tracking 4.11
You can then

• also use cassettes of non-standard size,
• in the event of an error (e.g. if lead type which has fallen into the
Bucky obstructs operation), also continue to work to a restricted
degree at a casualty unit.
To make this operating mode clearly recognizable,

• you cannot remove the key,
• the following appears in the display field
- "Restricted use"
- ,
- "M".
4.11 Tomography in combination with tracking

There is a starting position for tomographic movement. The tracking
device moves the center-locked tube assembly into the Tomo-SID lock-
in position once. After selecting the tomography unit, the tube assembly
moves into this position. The LED for vertical lock-in is lit. You can
change the table height of the BuckyDiagnost TH2 using the pedals at
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
the table.
If you cannot activate the tomography unit, an appropriate message
appears. You will find a list of all the possible messages in the appendix.
4.12 Mode display

This displays the currently active mode:
"A" – automatic collimation (sensing)
"AT" – automatic collimation and tracking
"M" – manual
"MT" – manual and tracking
4.13 Center position

In the center position the vertical radiation beam axis points to the cen-
ter of the cassette.
• DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF:
The Bucky unit is at the center.

• BuckyDiagnost CS:
- Longitudinal and transverse carriages are locked at the center.
- The system is locked in place in the vertical direction when the
table is at the preferred working height and the standard SID is set.
• BuckyDiagnost FS:
- The column is locked in place in the table top center position in
the longitudinal direction.
- The tube arm is locked in place in the table top center position.
- The system is locked in place in the vertical direction when the
table is at the preferred working height and the standard SID is set.

4.14 The Optimus generators
With a manual system or an oblique radiation beam axis you have to

set the center position manually; the mark on the grip of the cassette
tray or on the cassette serves as a guide. A system which has the tracking
function sets the standard SID automatically. The tracking function can
be ordered separately, provided that automatic cassette size sensing is
installed. Automatic cassette size sensing and the tomography unit can-
not be ordered separately.

What the generator "is capable of"
In the following table you can see which configurations offer which
exposure techniques:
Exposure techni- Configurations
ques
Basic version with APR with AEC with
without without without APR
APR, AEC AEC APR and AEC
kV technique - - + +
kV-mA technique - - - +
TDC - - - +
kV-mAs technique + + + +
kV-mAs-s technique + + + +
kV-mA-s technique - + - +
Possible configurations
• Basic version
• Also with AEC (optional)
• Also with APR (optional)
• Also with AEC and APR (optional).
These Instructions for Use describe all configurations.

The functions of the maximum configuration
• Exposure techniques
˗ APR with automatic exposure control (AEC)
˗ APR without AEC
• Techniques with automatic exposure control (AEC)
˗ kV technique
- with maximum tube power according to the focal spot selected

or
- with fixed current within the adjustable values
- tomography (TDC)
• Techniques without AEC

˗ kV-mAs technique
˗ kV-mA-s technique
˗ kV-mAs-s technique

The Optimus generators 4.14
Other functions
• Change exposure data of an APR program
˗ for the next exposures (without saving)
˗ with subsequent saving
• Save up to 1,000 APR programs
• Adapting the exposure data to the patient's build
• Area dose product (optional, depends on system)
• Variofocus (optional)
You can select a focal spot the properties of which are between the
large and small focal spots. The ratio of the two focal spots is stated
as a percentage of the small focal spot. "20% SF" means 20% weight-
ed power of the small focal spot and 80% weighted power of the
large focal spot. The Variofocus is set for each APR program during
installation.
What you have to know before switching on

• Please observe the instructions on safety and maintenance.
• If the LED of a button
˗ is lit: the function or the auxiliary is activated.
˗ is not lit: the function or the auxiliary is deactivated.
• If you reach a limit, the display goes out briefly and reappears.
• If you change a value and this causes a change in the mAs value, for
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
example, the new value will be indicated.

• If you wish to change a non-variable value, the value is retained, and
the display goes out briefly and reappears.
• After the end of an exposure there is an audible signal and the actual
exposure data appear for 25 s as a post-exposure display or until the
next operator action (only with AEC). Select to call up the post-
exposure display provided no new exposure has been released.
• You can make up to three exposures a minute in any sequence. When
doing so it is absolutely essential that you observe the tube assembly
status display and the information contained in the Instructions for
Use delivered with the tube assembly.
• If you attempt to make a forth exposure within one minute, it will
not be released. The generator prevents any further exposure for one
minute.
Exceptions:
There is no limitation to three exposures per minute
˗ if you release fluoroscopy within one minute and before the
fourth exposure at the latest or
˗ in the serial mode.
For pediatric exposures please read the note (chapter 5.6).

4.15 Monitoring system for conditions for shutting down radiography
4.15 Monitoring system for conditions for shutting

down radiography
The generator has a monitoring system which, in the event of an error,
protects against uncontrolled radiation, within the scope of foreseeable
possibilities. With radiography using automatic exposure control this
monitoring system interrupts the radiation if any of the following con-
ditions are met:
• Stage 1: if the mAs value has reached 9.5 times the mAs value of the
APR selected,
• Stage 2: if after 10% of the maximum permissible exposure time at
least 4% of the expected switch-off dose has not been reached,
• Stage 3: if 600 mAs or 4 s has been reached (the value of 600 mAs
can be set lower by Customer Service).
If you change an APR program temporarily, stages 1 and 2 switch

off. If so, an asterisk "*" will appear in the program name (chapter
7.6.5.4). Stage 2 remains activated for the 10% of the maximum expo-
sure time, even stage 3 remains activated. If you wish to accept the
changed program as a fixed program, you must enter the mAs values to
be expected via the mAs technique in order to adapt stages 1 and 2 to
the new programming (for reference you will find an exposure table in
the appendix). Stages 1 and 2 are then reactivated.

Contents
5 Legend .............................................................. 5-3
5.1 The system ........................................................................ 5-3

5.2 PC and peripherals ........................................................... 5-4
5.3 The ceiling suspension units BuckyDiagnost CS2/4 .......... 5-6
5.4 The control grip of the automatic collimator ..................... 5-8
5.5 The control grip of the manual collimator ....................... 5-10
5.7 The vertical Bucky BuckyDiagnost VS ............................ 5-13
5.8 The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact ......... 5-23
5.9 The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM (horizontal) ............ 5-29
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
5.10 The mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS ...................... 5-34

5.11 The patient tables DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF ................... 5-35
5.12 The patient table Single Sided Table TH-S ..................... 5-38
......................................................................................... 5-39
5.14 The patient transport table TRAUMOB X ...................... 5-40
5.15 The plate reader DigitalDiagnost Compano .................... 5-40
5.16 The plate readers S and S Plus ......................................... 5-42

Contents

5 Legend
5.1 The system

The system consists of the following components (example):
2
1
2 1
3
3
1 Ceiling suspension unit

- BuckyDiagnost CS2/4
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
2 Wall stand
- DigitalDiagnost VM
- DigitalDiagnost VS
3 Patient table
- DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF
- Single Sided Table TH-S
not Mobile floor stand
shown - BuckyDiagnost FS S
- BuckyDiagnost FS C
- BuckyDiagnost FS F
Patient table
- DigitalDiagnost TF
- Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M
Generator
- Optimus 50/65/80
Keyboard and monitor
PC
- SUN Ultra Sparc 10
- SUN Sunblade 2500
Due to the low storage capacity of the SUN Ultra Sparc 10 stitching
is not possible with this system, and some high-memory functions

will run more slowly.
Plate reader
- DigitalDiagnost Compano
- S and S Plus
The individual components are described below.
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Legend 5-3

5.2 PC and peripherals
5.2 PC and peripherals

SUN Sunblade 2500
1
1 no function
2 CD-R drive (software installation, configuration back-up, image storage
(optional))
3 USB connector (at rear)
4 On/Off
The mouse (example)

To ensure correct functioning of the mouse, it must be used in con-
junction with the mouse mat supplied.
• Left mouse button:
solely for selection
• Middle button:
for certain functions in the control image and image display field.
• Right mouse button:
for certain functions in the control image and image display field.
As with the keyboard, you can use the mouse
• to select lines from lists
• to press soft keys (buttons) on the monitor.
To do so, move the cursor to the required line or button with the mouse
and press the left mouse button. This action is referred to below as
"clicking" or "clicking on" something.
5-4 Legend DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

PC and peripherals 5.2
The barcode reader

With the barcode reader (optional) you can
• select patient data from a list of barcodes,
• select patient data from a patient query window (optional) if a bar-
code is available from the RIS
Customer Service can inform you about legible barcodes. Please only
use the barcode readers approved by Philips.
The keyboard
Help Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 •
– +
Print Scroll
Screen Lock Pause
Stop Again ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + Back Space Insert Home Page • / * –

Up Num
` 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = Lock
Props Undo Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P { } | Del End Page 7 8 9 +

Down
[ ] \ Home Pg Up
Front Copy • A S D F G H J K L : " 4 5 6

Enter
Caps Lock ; ' —
Open Paste Shift Z X C V B N M < > ? 1 2 3 Enter

Shift
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
, . / End Pg Dn
♦ ♦ • 0 .
Find Cut Control Alt
Com Alt
pose Graph Ins Del
Alphanumeric keys and function keys

F1 Currently no function.
F12
to
Move to next entry field.
Shift lock on
Select symbols with shift or upper-case letters.
Alt Select third character on a key.
Delete with backspace.

Confirm entry.
Select next/previous patient in patient list.
Switch on system.
Please observe switch-off procedure (chapter 7.1.4)

5.3 The ceiling suspension units BuckyDiagnost CS2/4
All other keys not explicitly described here are used to input text and
digits.
Service keys
Help Esc
Stop Again Insert Home Page

Up
Props Undo Del End Page

Down
Front Copy
Open Paste
Find Cut ♦ Com Alt

pose Graph
5.3 The ceiling suspension units BuckyDiagnost

CS2/4
The main components
2
3 4
1 Ceiling suspension unit

2 Tube assembly
3 Control grip
4 Collimator Philips Medical Systems, November 2006

The ceiling suspension units BuckyDiagnost CS2/4 5.3
Function
1 2
4
5
6
The BuckyDiagnost CS can be freely moved longitudinally and trans-

versely; the telescopic column allows the tube assembly, collimator and
control grip to move vertically up and down.
The directions of movement are color-coded. You will find the colors
next to the corresponding buttons on the control grip and on the ceiling
suspension unit.
They are as follows:
1 Movement along the table top: green

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
2 Movement at right angles to the table top: blue

3 Raise/lower: yellow
4 Rotation of tube assembly round its transverse axis: black
5 Rotation of tube assembly round the stand axis: purple
6 Rotation of collimator round the radiation beam axis
Second ceiling suspension unit

If your system is equipped with a second ceiling suspension unit with a
tube assembly and light-beam diaphragm, bear the following in mind:
• The two ceiling suspension units are of identical design and freely
movable, although free exposures are only possible with tube assem-
bly 1 (table tube assembly).
• Irrespective of free movement, each tube assembly is logically as-
signed to a specific auxiliary. This means that the tube assembly can
always remain aligned to the relevant auxiliary. Example: Tube as-
sembly 1 is always aligned to the table, and tube assembly 2 always
to the wall stand.
• This means that the system does not enable radiation if you
˗ align the tube assembly assigned to the table to the wall stand or
˗ align the tube assembly assigned to the wall stand to the table.
Customer Service will adjust the parking position of the second ceiling
suspension unit according to the room size. If the room is of sufficient
size, the parking position will be identical to the standard position of
the wall stand.

5.4 The control grip of the automatic collimator
5.4 The control grip of the automatic collimator
System SID 115 18 x 24 Memory
AN
1 0 Al Filter
kidney ap APR
Ð + 12.0 40 2s Tomo Test
0 30
30
2 3 2
4 5
6
10
9
7 8 7
1 Display field
2 Knobs for setting the collimator
3 Key-operated switch (not in view)
4 Switch on light field indicator
5 Tape measure for measuring SID
6 Button to enable
- tube assembly longitudinally and
- tube assembly transversely and
- raise/lower tube assembly
7 Rails for accessories
8 Central laser
9 Slider for covering the SID laser and the central laser
10 SID laser (flashing, option)
System Ready for exposure

Tube assembly selected
Bucky in the table (auxiliary 1 (AUX 1))
Tomography unit (AUX 2)
Wall Bucky (AUX 3)
Free cassette (AUX 4)

The control grip of the automatic collimator 5.4
Decrease/increase tomographic height (from table top)

– +
SID 115 SID in cm
18 x 24 Radiation field in cm2
AT Mode display
0 Al Added filter
kidney ap APR program
12.0 Tomographic height in cm
40° 2s Tomographic angle, Tomographic time
Restricted operation Operation with key-operated switch
Memory
Collimator
- Set to the last value set manually
- Set to the value preset by the APR program
Filter
- Select added filter in the radiation beam or
- Change the value preset by the APR program
APR
Select APR program (4 per auxiliary)
Select tomographic program (angle, time)

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Tomo
Test
- Start test run for tomographic exposure (without radia-
tion)
- Call up help text if "ready for exposure" symbol is not
displayed
Switch on light field indicator and both lasers (switch off
automatically; SID laser is lit even with AUX 4).
30
0 30
Indication of angle when tube assembly is rotated round its
transverse axis
Enable transverse tube assembly movement (blue)
Enable longitudinal tube assembly movement (green)
Enable rotation of the tube assembly round the stand axis

(purple)
Enable vertical tube assembly movement (yellow)
Enable tube assembly swivel round its transverse axis (black)


5.5 The control grip of the manual collimator
5.5 The control grip of the manual collimator
0 30
30
1 SID
cm
maximal film size
13 18 20 24 25 28 30 35 40 43
2
100 40'' 13 18 20 24 25 28 30 35.5 40 43
110 43'' 12 16.5 18.5 22 23.5 25.5 27.5 32.5 36.5 39
115 45'' 11 15.5 17.5 21 22 24.5 26.5 31 35 37.5
120 48'' 10.5 15 16.5 20 21 23 25 30 33.5 35.5
150 60'' 8.5 12 13 16 17 18.5 20 23.5 26.5 28.5
180 72'' 7 10 11 13 14 15 16.5 19.5 22 23.5
200 78'' 6.5 9 10 12 13 14 15 18 20 21.5
inch 5'' 7'' 8'' 9.5'' 10'' 11'' 12'' 14'' 16'' 17''
SID maximal film size
3 4 3
5
10
9
6 7 8 7
1 Rotating disk for added filters

2 Switch on light field indicator
3 Knobs for setting the collimator
4 Settings table
5 Button to enable
- tube assembly longitudinally and
- tube assembly transversely and
- raise/lower tube assembly
6 Tape measure for measuring SID
7 Rails for accessories
8 Central laser
9 Slider for covering the SID laser and the central laser
10 SID laser (flashing, option)
Switch on light field indicator and both lasers (switch off
automatically; SID laser is lit even with AUX 4)
30
0 30
Indication of angle when tube assembly is rotated round its
transverse axis
Tube assembly selected
Enable transverse tube assembly movement (blue)
Enable longitudinal tube assembly movement (green)
Enable rotation of the tube assembly round the stand axis

(purple)

Enable vertical tube assembly movement (yellow)
Enable tube assembly swivel round its transverse axis (black)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
mA-s Reset
AEC
70 kV 25 mAs 50 ms
14 19 9 10 11 12 13
15 20
Oesophagus 110 kV 3.5 mA 2:45
Vetriculus Rectum*
Duodenum Thorax
16 21
17 22 Colon
24 28
18 23
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
25 26 27
The displays illustrated are examples.

The exposure switch has two positions.
Position 1: Preparation – The green Ready indicator goes out.
When it lights up again:
Position 2: Release exposure.
You can press the button straight through to the second position. After
the preparation time the exposure is released. Keep the button pressed
until the end of exposure or else the exposure will be aborted.
Specially for pediatric exposures and ER, for example, Customer Service
can program the preparation time to 30 s for each tube selected. Prep-
aration remains on even after letting go of the exposure switch from the
"Preparation" stage, provided no exposure has been released.
After exposure, preparation is switched off.
1 Switch off generator

2 Switch on generator
3 Select exposure technique
4 Ready for exposure
5 Radiation ON
6 Display of the tube assembly state
7 Incorrect exposure indicator
8 Reset functions
9 Switch on/off automatic exposure control

10 Selection and display of exposure voltage

11 Selection and display of exposure current
12 Selection and display of exposure time
13 Call up different levels
14 Auxiliary Bucky in the table
15 Auxiliary wall Bucky
16 Small focus
17 Variofocus
18 Large focus
19 Auxiliary tomography
20 Auxiliary free cassette
21-23 Select automatic exposure control measuring fields
24 Display field
25 Slim patient
26 Stout patient
27 Scroll through the display pages
You will find an overview of all button symbols in the appendix.

The upper display field
Display and selection of the generator data.
Green ready lamp: Ready for exposure.
Radiation is switched on.
Display of the tube assembly state

(depending on system and tube assembly, please also observe the in-
structions in the Instructions for Use for the X-ray tube assembly).
Color(s) Meaning
green Full power available
yellow + The tube assembly is warm, full power available
green
yellow Up to 80% of the full power is available
yellow + Up to 64% of the full power is available
red
red The thermo safety switch in the tube assembly is activated.
No exposure possible.
Incorrect exposure indicator; if it flashes,

- you have let go of the exposure switch prematurely or
- the exposure time or mAs limit has been reached or
- the exposure has been aborted owing to incorrect exposure (incorrect
exposure early warning system).

The vertical Bucky BuckyDiagnost VS 5.7
The lower display field

(line 1, column 1) (line 1, column 2)
Display and selection of the APR programs, the current selection is

highlighted.
If there is an APR menu, "Menu" appears in line 4, column 2. You can
call it up with the corresponding button.
Scroll through pages; if the LED is lit, at least two pages have been
programmed. After the last page, page 1 reappears.
If, after scrolling, you press the exposure switch to "Preparation" the
following appear
- the APR program last selected,
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
- the appropriate exposure data.

If you have changed the data of a program, an asterisk appears after the
name of the program. The modified data remain intact (even if you
change the auxiliary for example) until you select the same program
again or a different one.
5.7 The vertical Bucky BuckyDiagnost VS

These Instructions for Use describe the BuckyDiagnost VS with oper-
ation from the left-hand side. A right-handed unit must be operated
accordingly. By operation, changing the grids and cassettes is meant. All
other controls are on both sides of the unit – except in the basic package.
Design and functioning
The most basic configuration of the BuckyDiagnost VS (BuckyDiag-
nost VS (basic package)) consists of a column with a vertical carriage
carrying the Bucky unit with interchangeable grid. Depending on the
version you have, it can be operated from left or right. A stretch grip is
optionally available, which is fixed to the column.
The following versions are available:

- for cassettes (film or PCR)
- with integrated digital detector (only with certain options).
• BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package)
It is the more user-friendly version with the following extras:
˗ Integrated storage for grids that are not in use (max. 2)
˗ Measuring field group selection
˗ Operation using controls mounted on the right and left

˗ Facility for adding on other options.

• "Tilting" option
It also allows:
˗ motorized tilting of the Bucky unit
˗ 2nd Function
Tilting must only be started up; it then stops automatically in one
of three defined positions.
• "Motorized height adjustment" option
It is standard with the digital wall stand and allows:
˗ Vertical movement of the Bucky unit, either manually (counter-
balanced) or motorized with two speeds.
˗ Wireless remote control
˗ 2nd Function
Vertical movement must only be started up; it then stops auto-
matically in one of four defined positions.
A combination of "tilting" and "motorized height adjustment" is pos-

sible. Then you can move the tube assembly to the desired SID during
automatic movement of the Bucky unit from the horizontal to the ver-
tical position, for instance.
The BuckyDiagnost VS with digital detector always includes:
• motorized height adjustment
• remote control.

The components
2
3
4
5
6 8
7
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
10
11
1 Column
2 Control unit; left and right (BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package))
3 Display (optional)
4 Digital detector (tilting feature optional)
5 Spacer (optional)
6 Remote control (part of the "motorized height adjustment" option)

7 Charging station for the remote control (mounted on the column, op-
tional)
8 Grip with button to release the brakes (BuckyDiagnost VS (basic pack-
age))
9 Patient grips (right and left, BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package))

10 Measuring field display, (on generator, BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced

package))
11 Centering panels; measuring chamber accessory for SID = 100 cm and
SID = 180 cm; mounted on the accessory rails of the collimator
The manual cassette tray
1 2 3 4
1 Grip of the cassette tray

2 Marks for centering the tube assembly opposite the cassette tray if cas-
sette is inserted centrally
3 Cassette clamping device
4 Marks for centering cassette
5 Sensor for cassette size sensing (optional)
6 Holder for cassettes (and sensor for cassette size sensing (optional))
The control unit and the remote control

• The remote control is part of the "motorized height adjustment"
option.

Trackin g
1
1
2 3
4 Memory
5 6
4
Memory
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
5 6
8
No. Symbol Meaning

1 Auxiliary (AUX) selected
Tracking LED lit: tracking on (press AUX twice)
Select auxiliary.

No. Symbol Meaning

2 Select measuring field group:
Of the five measuring fields which the exposure measuring
chamber has, a group of three is selected at any one time.
You select the measuring fields by selecting an APR program
or by selecting the measuring fields on the generator. The
LEDs indicate which measuring fields are active.
- The top edge of the front panel is defined by the chin
rest.
- Orientation of the measuring fields to the top or bottom
refers to the chin rest.
- Off-center cassette loading is only possible in these direc-
tions.
- If the front panel is horizontal, the cassette must be cen-
tered on insertion. If the patient is lying on a trolley and is
positioned over the horizontal front panel, right / left on the
front panel will become top / bottom for the patient. The
measuring chamber orientation left / right can be selected
as appropriate for this position.
On collimation the following must be observed:
Load Bucky grid without cassette size sensing or
load Bucky grid with cassette size sensing (currently
only manual operation):
Observe the measuring field position(s) on collimation.
Load Bucky grid with cassette size sensing activat-
ed:
- image receptor in 0° or 90° position
- radiation beam axis vertical or horizontal
- aligned to center of image receptor
- cassettes are centered on insertion in the Bucky.
Load Bucky grid with cassette size sensing activated
in a Bucky wall stand in combination with tracking
and off-center cassette position:
- image receptor in 0° position
- radiation beam axis horizontal
- aligned to center of image receptor.
With off-center collimation the tube assembly moves up-
wards (or downwards) on collimation until the radiation
field is level with the top (bottom) end of the film.
For digital systems:
- image receptor in 0° or 90° position
- radiation beam axis vertical or horizontal
- aligned to center of image receptor.
With off-center collimation the tube assembly moves up-
wards (or downwards) on collimation until the radiation
field is level with the top (bottom) edge of the image re-
ceptor.
Note:
If the system detects that the collimated radiation field no
longer covers the outside measuring fields (or with off-cen-

ter collimation the middle measuring field is outside the
collimated field), a warning is displayed.
In this case collimation should be checked:
Either other measuring fields should be selected or the ra-
diation field should be recollimated.
As the system remains ready for operation, it should be
checked without fail that the radiation field and measuring
fields selected match up.

No. Symbol Meaning

3 Switch on light field indicator.
Set collimator.
4 Memory
Collimator
- set to the last value set manually
- set to full size; to default with digital detector
Switch from portrait to landscape format and vice versa
(only on the version with digital detector)
(only with tracking on the version with digital detector);

Press once: The current collimation status is displayed.
Press twice: Switch between centered and off-center colli-
mation.
After a button is pressed, the LEDs on the remote control
light up briefly.
top edge fixed
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Top off-center collimation:

Radiation field lies at top of detector field.
centre fixed
Centered collimation
bottom edge fixed
Bottom off-center collimation:

Radiation field lies at bottom of detector field.

No. Symbol Meaning

5
2nd Function means: Together with ("move to posi-
tion").
1st function: Raise Bucky unit slowly (motorized) 1
2nd function: Bucky unit automatically moves into the top
vertical position (type: lung position) 2
1st function: Raise Bucky unit quickly (motorized) 1
2nd function: Bucky unit automatically moves upward to
-20° (type: skull position) 2
1st function: Lower Bucky unit slowly (motorized) 1
2nd function: Bucky unit automatically moves into the bot-
tom vertical position (type: knee etc.) 2
1st function: Lower Bucky unit quickly (motorized) 1
tom horizontal position (type: table position) 2
6 1st function: Tilt Bucky unit into the horizontal position
(motorized)1
2nd function: Bucky unit automatically moves into the hor-
izontal position. 2
1st function: Tilt Bucky unit into the vertical position (mo-
torized)1
2nd function:
- detector not vertical: detector moves into the vertical po-
sition. The height remains the same.
- detector vertical: detector moves to -20°. The height re-
mains the same.
Select 2nd function.
7 Raise/lower the Bucky unit manually.
8 Charging indicator; if it flashes for approx. 5 s after a button

is pressed: Charge battery. The charging indicator flashes
during charging.
1
Dead man's principle – the unit only moves if a button is pressed and
held down.
2
Switch on 2nd function with buttons 5 and 6.
The lock-ins of the 2nd function are preset by the manufacturer; Cus-
tomer Service can change them.
The exposure unit
BuckyDiagnost VS (basic package)

2
3
4 5 6
7
1 Chin rest
2 Grip of Bucky with centering aid
3 Grid slit
4 "Eject grid" button
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
5 Image center marks by way of a guide for inserting a cassette off-center

6 Display of the position of the automatic exposure control measuring
fields
7 LEDs
Yellow LED lit: grid is inserted and detected
Yellow LED flashing: error;
grid not detected or
grid not in start position or
self-test after inserting the grid
Yellow LED unlit: no grid inserted
Green LED unlit: no cassette inserted
Green LED flashing: cassette inserted, size not detected
Green LED lit: cassette correctly inserted.
8 Grip with button to release the brake for vertical movement
The exposure unit

BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package)

1
2
3
4
5 6 7
1 Chin rest
2 Flap of storage slot for grids (hidden)
4 Grid slit
5 "Eject grid" button
LEDs
Yellow LED lit: grid is inserted and detected
Yellow LED flashing: error;
grid not detected or
grid not in start position or
self-test after inserting the grid
Yellow LED unlit: no grid inserted
Green LED lit: cassette correctly inserted.
6 Image center marks by way of a guide for inserting a cassette off-center
7 Display of the position of the automatic exposure control measuring
fields
The stretch grip

for BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package, optional)

The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact 5.8
5.8 The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact
1
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
4 4
5
6 7
8 9
10 10
11 11
12
13
14

These Instructions for Use describe the unit with operation of the Bucky
from the right-hand side. A left-handed unit must be operated accord-
ingly.
1 Ceiling rail
2 Position mark (only in combination with BuckyDiagnost TH-S).
3 Column
4 Control desk (optional on either side)
5 Patient data display (optional accessory)
6 Release/block tube arm.
7 Grip with switch to swivel detector (on the rear).
8 Tube arm
9 Detector with
- collision guard
- display of the position of the automatic exposure control measuring
fields
- chin rest.
10 Grips with switches to move the column.
11 Patient grips
12 Remote control
13 Charger for remote control.
14 Floor rail

Trackin g
1
1
2 3
4 Memory
5 6
4
Memory
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
5 6
8
No. Symbol Meaning

1 Auxiliary (AUX) selected1
Tracking LED lit: tracking on (press AUX twice).
Select auxiliary.

Of the 5 measuring fields which the exposure measuring

No. Symbol Meaning

Set collimator.
4 Memory
Collimator
- set to automatic preset.
Switch from portrait to landscape format and vice versa.
(only with tracking);

Press once: The current status is displayed
mation.
light up briefly.
Top off-center collimation: Radiation field lies at top of de-
tector field:
top edge fixed
Centered collimation:
centre fixed
Bottom off-center collimation: Radiation field lies at bottom

of detector field:
bottom edge fixed

No. Symbol Meaning

5
tion").
1st function: Raise Bucky unit slowly (motorized).
vertical position (type: lung position).
1st function: Raise Bucky unit quickly (motorized)
-20° (type: skull position).
1st function: Lower Bucky unit slowly (motorized).
tom vertical position (type: knee etc.).
1st function: Lower Bucky unit quickly (motorized).
tom horizontal position (type: table position).
(motorized).
izontal position.
torized).
2nd function:
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

– detector vertical: detector moves to -20°. The height re-
mains the same.
7 Raise/lower the Bucky unit (manual).
8 Charging indicator; if it flashes for approx. 5 s after a button

is pressed:
Charge battery. The charging indicator flashes during charg-
ing.
1st function:
held down.
2nd function:
This is preset by the manufacturer; Customer Service can change it.
The patient data display (example)
Last Name
Winter
First Name Date of Birth
Marc 1950-12-01
PID/Accession Nr.
0610381858
APR Grid
abdomen ap=

Customer Service can program the screen contents. You can rotate the
monitor.
The stretch grip
(optional accessory)
If the stretch grip is locked, you can no longer tilt the the detector.
The detector
1
2
4
5
1 Lever for unlocking the grid (not visible).

2 Grid slit
3 Flap of grid shelf.
4 LED lit: Grid is inserted.

5 Button: Eject grid.

The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM (horizontal) 5.9
5.9 The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM (horizontal)
1 2
4 4
5
6 7
8 9
10 10
11 11
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12
13
14
These Instructions for Use describe the DigitalDiagnost VM unit with

the "horizontal movement" option with operation of the Bucky from
the right-hand side. A left-handed unit must be operated accordingly.
1 Ceiling rail
2 Position mark (only in combination with BuckyDiagnost TH-S).
3 Column
4 Control desk
5 Patient data display (optional accessory)
6 Release/block tube arm.
7 Grip with switch to swivel detector (on the rear).
8 Tube arm

9 Detector with
- collision guard
- display of the position of the automatic exposure control measuring
fields
- chin rest.
10 Grips with switches to move the column.
11 Patient grips
12 Remote control
13 Charger for remote control.
14 Floor rail
1
Trackin g
2 3
4 Memory
5 6
4 Memory
5 6
No. Symbol Meaning

1 Auxiliary (AUX) selected1

LED lit: tracking on (press AUX twice).
Select auxiliary.
Of the 5 measuring fields which the exposure measuring

No. Symbol Meaning

Set collimator.
4 Collimator
- set to automatic preset.
Switch from portrait to landscape format and vice versa.
(only with tracking);
Press once: The current status is displayed
mation.
light up briefly.
Top off-center collimation: Radiation field lies at top of de-
tector field:
top edge fixed
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Centered collimation:
centre fixed
Bottom off-center collimation: Radiation field lies at bottom

of detector field:
bottom edge fixed

No. Symbol Meaning

5
tion").
1st function: Move column to right (motorized).
vertical position (type: lung position).
1st function: Raise Bucky unit (motorized)
-20° (Lateral table exposure, type: skull position).
1st function: Move column to left (motorized).
tom vertical position (Free exposure, type: knee etc.).
1st function: Lower Bucky unit (motorized).
tom horizontal position (type: undertable position).
(motorized).
izontal position.
torized).
2nd function:
– detector vertical: detector moves to -20°. The height re-
mains the same.
7 Raise/lower the Bucky unit (manual).
1st function:
held down.
2nd function:
This is preset by the manufacturer; Customer Service can change it.
The patient data display (example)
Last Name
Winter
First Name Date of Birth
Marc 1950-12-01
PID/Accession Nr.
0610381858
APR Grid
abdomen ap=
Customer Service can program the screen contents. You can rotate the
monitor.
The stretch grip
(optional accessory)

If the stretch grip is locked, you can no longer tilt the the detector.
The detector
1
2
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
4
5
1 Lever for unlocking the grid (not visible).

2 Grid slit
3 Flap of grid shelf.
4 LED lit: Grid is inserted.
5 Button: Eject grid.

5.10 The mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS

The main components
BuckyDiagnost FS S
1 2 3
4 5
6
1 Control grip
2 Tube assembly
3 Vertical carriage
4 Collimator
5 Tube arm
6 Swivel joint
7 Column
8 Floor rails
BuckyDiagnost FS C
Floor-ceiling or floor-wall version Philips Medical Systems, November 2006

The patient tables DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF 5.11
BuckyDiagnost FS F
Fixed version
Function
The BuckyDiagnost FS is a mobile column on rails, and is available in
the following versions:
• floor stand
• floor-wall or floor-ceiling stand
• special fixed version without swivel.
1
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
2 The vertical carriage carries the swiveling tube arm, which is available
3 with or without telescopic extension. The tube arm carries the tube
5 assembly, the collimator and the control grip.
4
For the possible movements please refer to the drawing opposite.
The directions of movement are color-coded. You will find the colors
next to the corresponding buttons on the control grip and on the stand
(possibly not visible).
They are as follows:
6
1 Raise/lower: yellow
2 Movement at right angles to the table top: blue
3 Rotation of tube assembly round its transverse axis: black
4 Rotation of collimator round the radiation beam axis
5 Swivel of the tube arm: purple
6 Movement along the table top: green
5.11 The patient tables DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF

The DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF series consists of the versions
• DigitalDiagnost TF with fixed table top height and
• DigitalDiagnost TH2 with height-adjustable table top.

Longitudinal and transverse movements of the table top are manual

(TH2 and TF); upward and downward movements are motorized
(TH2).
The table has a Bucky unit which can be moved longitudinally by hand.
It is braked electrically. If the "Tomography" option is installed, move-
ment is servo-assisted.
You can order this table with:
• Tracking for SID (optional)
• Tracking for the image receptor (optional)
In combination with the tomography unit, you can carry out mo-
torized movement of the Bucky unit into the radiation beam axis.
The system collimates automatically.
• Tomography unit.
Height-adjustable table DigitalDiagnost TH2

1 2
3
4 4 5
67 8 9
10 11 12
11 10 12 11
13 14 15 16
1 Floating table top with rails for accessories

2 Handswitch (optional; can be installed anywhere on the rail, including
the rear)
3 Disable footswitches; the button is lit when the function is selected
4 Risk of trapping fingers
5 Equipotential bonding pin
6 Parking position for a grid
7 Cassette tray (optional servo assist)
8 Brake lever for cassette tray

9 Center indicator (optional)
10 Lower table top (motorized)
11 - Enable longitudinal and transverse movement of the table top (floating
table top)
- Switch on light field indicator
12 Raise table top (motorized)
13 Interchangeable grid
14 Lever for unlocking the cassette plate

15 Yellow LED unlit: no grid inserted

Yellow LED lit: grid inserted
Yellow LED flashing:
- inserted grid is not yet in start position
- error
with cassette size sensing (optional)
Green LED lit: cassette correctly inserted, size detected
Table with fixed height DigitalDiagnost TF

1 2
3
4 4 5
67 8
9
9
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
10 11 12 13
1 Floating table top with rails for accessories

2 Handswitch (optional; can be installed anywhere on the rail, including
the rear)
3 Disable footswitches; the button is lit when the function is selected
4 Risk of trapping fingers
5 Parking position for a grid
6 Cassette tray (optional servo assist)
7 Brake lever for cassette tray
8 Center indicator (optional)
9 - Enable longitudinal and transverse movement of the table top (floating
table top)
- Switch on light field indicator
10 Interchangeable grid
11 Lever for unlocking the cassette plate

5.12 The patient table Single Sided Table TH-S
12 Yellow LED unlit: no grid inserted

Yellow LED lit: grid inserted
Yellow LED flashing:
- inserted grid is not yet in start position
- error
with cassette size sensing (optional)
Green LED lit: cassette correctly inserted, size detected
The manual cassette tray
1
2
4 2 2 5
No. Meaning
1 Marks for centering cassette.
2 Cassette clamping device.
3 Mark for centering the tube assembly opposite the cassette tray if cas-
sette is inserted centrally.
4 Sensor for cassette size sensing (optional).
5 Holder for cassettes (and sensor for cassette size sensing (optional)).

This patient table is designed for usage with the radiographic device
DigitalDiagnost VM.
The table top
• is supported on a single side, thus offering you easy access to the
patient,
• is radiolucent, except in the area marked gray,
• can be raised and lowered by motorized movement,
• can be moved manually in a horizontal direction ("floating table

top").
The table has an equipotential ground (earth) connection point, and

you can disable the footswitches.

The patient transport table Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M 5.13
1
2
3
4
5 6 7
1 "Floating table top"; the marking indicates the area that is not radiolu-
cent.
2 2 buttons to disable the footswitches and enable movement in the event
of a collision; the buttons are lit when the function is selected.
3 Equipotential bonding pin
4 Column
5 Lower table top (motorized).
6 Enable longitudinal and transverse movement of the "floating table top".
7 Raise table top (motorized).
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
5.13 The patient transport table Height Adjustable

Trolley TA-M
2
1
3 4
1 Grip
2 Table top
3 Lower table top
4 Raise/lower table top
5 Lock all castors

All castors freely movable
Brake front castors "forwards", rear castors freely movable

Move table top longitudinally
"Floating" table top
The free-floating part of the table top is especially transparent to X-rays.

5.14 The patient transport table TRAUMOB X

The height of the table top can be adjusted, so the patient, along with
the mattress for instance, can be conveniently transferred from the
TRAUMOB X to an examination table. It is just as simple to adjust the
height of the mattress at the bedside.
2 2
1
4 4
1 Table top, removable.

2 Grip with lever to unlock the height adjustment.
3 Pedal to lock, unlock and brake the swiveling castors.
4 Swivelling castors
Table movements
5.15 The plate reader DigitalDiagnost Compano

What is a plate reader?
The plate reader in the DigitalDiagnost system is used to read out the
image plates exposed with the cassette technique as some views may not
be directly possible with the digital detector. The image plate is un-
loaded from the cassette and then read out. The X-ray image is stored
on the image plate in the form of excited charge carriers. The image
information is digitized on readout and subsequently processed on the
computer of the DigitalDiagnost system. The image plate is erased after

The plate reader DigitalDiagnost Compano 5.15
readout to restore it to the initial state and then loaded into the cassette.
It is then ready for re-exposure.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10
1
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12 11
1 Compano plate reader

2 Control panel
3 Load lamp
Lights up green:
- start-up procedure successfully completed
- plate reader ready.
4 Status displays for cassette processing; they flash during cassette proc-
essing.
5 Unload lamp
Lights up green:
- cassette processing finished.
6 Message indicator
When this indicator lights up (yellow), a window with special instructions
appears on the monitor of the preview console. Follow these instruc-
tions. If an error message appears, an audible warning signal is given if
activated.
7 "Erase" button for primary and secondary erasure.
Pressing the button once activates the secondary erasure mode, and
appears on the display next to the button. If the button is pressed
again, the primary erasure mode is activated, and appears. To return
to the routine mode: press button again.

5.16 The plate readers S and S Plus
8 Pilot lamp
Lights up green when the main switch is in position "I" (on) and the
power supply is connected. As the main switch normally remains in the
"on" position, the pilot lamp is also continuously lit.
9 Cassette compartment
Used for exposing a cassette containing the image plate.
10 Reset switch
Only for restarting in the event of disruptions; do not press it under
normal operating conditions.
11 Main switch
Always remains in position "I". Switching it off is only advisable in the
event of prolonged stoppages.
12 Dust filter/ventilator
1
2
6
3
4 5 9 78
10
13
12
11
The plate readers S and S Plus are identical with the exception of their
readout speed. The plate reader reads out the exposed image plates. The
image plates are contained in the plate cassettes.
No. Meaning
1 Monitor (see below)
2 Buttons for selecting mode
With these buttons, you can select the modes assigned on screen.

The plate readers S and S Plus 5.16
No. Meaning
3 Pilot lamp
Lights up green when the main switch is in position "I" (on).
4 Energy-saving indicator
If the light is flashing, the monitor is in energy-saving mode.
5 Ready indicator
If it is lit (green), the plate reader is ready for operation.
6 Status display for cassette processing
Lights up (green): the cassette was inserted correctly.
Flashes (green): processing complete.
Unlit: the image plate is in the cassette again.
7 Unload lamp
Flashes blue when the cassette can be removed. After the cassette has
been removed, the lamp goes out.
8 Message indicator
When it lights up (yellow), a window with special instructions appears
on the monitor of the operator’s console. Follow these instructions. If
an error message appears, an audible warning signal is given.
9 Power switch
Switches on the plate reader if the main switch is in position "I" (on).
10 Cassette compartment with dust filter
For exposure of a cassette with an image plate.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
11 Main switch
Is always left in position "I" (on). Switching it off is only advisable in the
event of prolonged stoppages.
12 Mains connection
13 Socket for connecting external devices.

Start screen
No. Meaning
1 Text box
The name of the selected menu appears here.
2 Field for system messages
3 - User instructions
- Status display
4 Progress indicator
It displays the status of cassette processing (see below).
5 Function data annotation
6 Network connection status

The progress indicator
No cassette inserted
lights
Cassette inserted, starting readout

lights
Image plate readout

lights
Deleting
lights
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Deleting finished
flashes
Readout finished, removing cassette

flashes


Contents
6 The screen layouts .......................................... 6-3
6.1 What you should know about the structure of the screen
layouts ............................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Start window ..................................................................... 6-4
6.3 Patient list ......................................................................... 6-5
6.4 DICOM RIS query ........................................................... 6-8
6.5 Examination list ................................................................ 6-9
6.6 Select additional examination .......................................... 6-12
6.7 Control image ................................................................. 6-14
6.8 Functions for image manipulation ................................... 6-16
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
6.9 Opening examination ...................................................... 6-18

6.10 Selecting .......................................................................... 6-19
6.11 Sorted by ......................................................................... 6-21
6.12 Input screen ..................................................................... 6-22
6.13 Selecting gender ............................................................... 6-24
6.14 Selecting anatomical group .............................................. 6-25
6.15 Selecting examination ...................................................... 6-26
6.16 Scheduled examinations ................................................... 6-27
6.17 Change ............................................................................ 6-28
6.18 Emergency ....................................................................... 6-30
6.19 Viewing patient images .................................................... 6-32
6.20 Displaying image (classic) ................................................ 6-35
6.21 Displaying image + menu ................................................ 6-39
6.22 Displaying image (UNIQUE) ......................................... 6-41
6.23 Semi-automatic mode (UNIQUE) .................................. 6-43

6.23.1 UNIQUE – Standard settings ........................... 6-43
6.23.2 UNIQUE – Expert settings .............................. 6-45
6.24 Image processing screen ................................................... 6-48
6.25 Storage medium .............................................................. 6-50
6.26 Print ................................................................................ 6-52
6.27 Hard copy unit calibration .............................................. 6-60
6.28 System menu ................................................................... 6-62
6.29 Service tools ..................................................................... 6-63

Contents
6.30 Clinical quality control – Exposure statistics .................... 6-63

6.31 Clinical quality control – Exposure data .......................... 6-66

6 The screen layouts
6.1 What you should know about the structure of

the screen layouts
All screen layouts shown are examples.
Many of the screen layouts are partially identical. You can use the but-
tons as an alternative to the keyboard.
With the screen layout you can
• scroll through a list if it has more lines than can be displayed in the
screen layout or the lines are longer than the width of the screen
layout.
For this purpose use , , and or the scroll bar.
˗ Scroll up:
Click on
or
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
click in the gray area above the light bar and hold the button
down
or
click on the light bar and move up with the button held down.
˗ Scroll down:
Click on
or proceed accordingly as described above.
˗ Scroll to the right:
Click on . Depending on the configuration you will see two
more pages with less important information such as
– scheduled examination
– internal patient counter
– origin of patient entry.
˗ Scroll to the left:
Click on .
• Select patient data:
Click in the relevant line; it will be highlighted black.
• Start an examination with "Start exam".
Buttons with black script are active, buttons with gray script are not
active.
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 The screen layouts 6-3

6.2 Start window
6.2 Start window
Button Meaning
Username Username
Password Password
OK Confirm entry.
Emergency Emergency
Password Change password.
Restart Restart system.
Shutdown Shut down system.
6-4 The screen layouts DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

Patient list 6.3
6.3 Patient list

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The information fields have the following meanings:

• Upper part of screen; this shows
˗ Name and data of patient selected
˗ Patient ID
˗ Referring doctor
˗ Buttons for selection of certain functions and patient data.
• Customer Service can customize the patient list according to your
requirements.
• Lower part of screen
The areas next to the buttons are normally green. A red area indicates
that you should check this function. Click on the relevant button for
further information.

6.3 Patient list
Button Meaning
Start Exam Start exam.
Alternatively you can start the examination by double
clicking on the patient name.
operator Username of current user.
Logout Current system status (logout, logon, change in techni-

cian, …)
Open Call up information about data of patient selected.
Close Hide additional information.
Patient List Status: Status of patient list.
Find The blank screen "Select" appears. You can enter a

search criterion (chapter 7.1.18).
Sorted By: You can open a submenu and select from 6 predefined
sorting criteria.
Page Change page.
Enter The input window appears so you can enter new patient
data (chapter 7.1.5).
Modify The "Modify" window appears so you can change or de-
lete selected patient data (chapter 7.1.19, chapter
7.1.20).
Emergency The "Emergency" window appears so you can enter the
data of an emergency patient manually (chapter 7.1.21).
Worklist Query (only when DICOM worklist management is activated,
optional)
Start an RIS worklist query from the DigitalDiagnost
system. The RIS will respond with the entire worklist
for this workstation. Depending on the configuration,
patient and examination data are added to the worklist
or the existing entries supplemented accordingly. The
query will take several seconds depending on the RIS
connected and the network.
The following colors appear in the relevant display:
green: query successful, "standby" mode
yellow: query in progress, response expected from the
RIS
red: error
Customer Service can program the system so that quer-
ies are performed in the background. This allows you to
make use of "Worklist Query" between the automatic
intervals.

Patient list 6.3
Button Meaning
Patient Query (only when worklist management is activated, option-
al)
Open a new window to request patient data from RIS
(optional).
Start an RIS patient query from the DigitalDiagnost sys-
tem. The RIS will respond with the relevant worklist for
this patient only. Depending on the configuration, pa-
tient and examination data are added to the patient list
or the existing entries supplemented accordingly. The
query will take several seconds depending on the RIS
connected and the network.
The following colors appear in the relevant display:
green: query successful, "standby" mode
yellow: query in progress, response expected from the
RIS
red: error
View Display, print or process images of selected patient
(chapter 7.1.22).
Processing
External Device Open the "Storage medium" window (storage medium,

DICOM) and connection to other equipment (RIS, Easy-
Vision, …).
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
HCU Call up information about local printer.
System • Open the "System menu" window to shut down

system.
• Call up the service tool.

6.4 DICOM RIS query
6.4 DICOM RIS query
You can use this function to call up a patient name from the RIS if the
system is equipped with DICOM worklist management.
To do so, you must enter the relevant data in one or more fields.
Customer Service can configure this screen and the syntax according to
your requirements.
Button/Field Meaning
Accession Number Number of current exposure (alphanumeric).
Patient ID ID of current patient (alphanumeric).
Requ’d Procedure ID Code of current examination (alphanumeric).
DICOM Patient Name Patient name
Idle green: request successful

yellow: request in progress ...
red: error, timeout
Confirm Confirm entry.

Examination list 6.5
Help Display help text.
Close Close screen, reject request.
6.5 Examination list

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
This screen appears when you click on Start Exam in the patient list or
double click in the relevant line.

6.5 Examination list
Acquisition: This shows all anatomy examinations in chronological
order:
Upper-case letters, bold: Examination (heading)
Lower-case letters, bold: Scheduling of relevant exami-
nation
Lower-case letters, light-face: Examination performed.
Routine examinations are marked with * and selected
automatically.
After clicking on "Next" or "Confirm" the system auto-
matically moves to the next routine examination.
Add Add more examinations.
Final MPPS Status: You can select Final MPPS Status when the default set-
ting is not suitable for a patient (the default setting is
"Completed" with one or more exposures per exami-
nation). It defines the MPPS-DICOM message for this
examination. The following settings are possible:
- in progress
- completed (default for each examination with one or
more exposures)
- discontinued
Reader: Image plate reader
Registration Device: Blue rhombus: AUX is selected

Gray rhombus: AUX is not selected
Symbol is not shown: AUX is not available.
Select AUX 1: Bucky tables
Select AUX 2: Tomography
Select AUX 3: Wall stands
Select AUX 4: Free exposure
Grid State: A grid is inserted in the AUX selected.

No grid is inserted in the AUX selected.
Grid state does not

match with view
This text only appears when an
examination
- with grid has been selected and no grid is inserted or

- without grid has been selected and a grid is inserted.
With free exposures or PCR exposures information
about the cassette or reader appears here.
MTRA Input of operator identification (optional and configu-
rable).

Examination list 6.5
Image Data The following data which have been actually switched
appear after exposure:
kV
mAs
ms
dGycm2
EI (sensitivity)
- recommended: 400 for normal dose
- permissible: 200 … 800
- low dose: 800
- permissible: 1200 … 400
Exposure no.: exposure counter
Filter: Filter in radiation beam
SID
Label
Marker Flag view/position with e.g. R or L.
Label Flag image with direction of view.
Annotation Annotate image.
Reset Reset all displays to default values.

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Shutter Display image field on screen.
Re-ranger Re-calculate gray shades. You must use this func-

tion after adjusting collimation. If you omit this,
brightness and density will not be shown cor-
rectly.
Reset Reset collimator to default values of automatic collima-
tion.
Orientation Format of image displayed (only locally for this function).
Rotate Rotate image.

Angles possible:
- 0°
- 90°
- 180°
- 270°
Mirror Mirror image.
Stitching Compose images.
Print Preview View image before printing.

Print Image Print confirmed image. On one film you can only print
images of one examination.
Export Image to: Export image after DICOM
Storage medium: Save to CD-R
DICOM: Save after DICOM
Toggle Tools Call up tools to process image.

Save image to working pool for subsequent processing.
Next Select next exposure.

6.6 Select additional examination
Reject Repeat exposure; the current image is not print-
ed/exported!
The current image is saved in the Clinical Quality Con-
trol tool (if this license is available).
Confirm The image is processed, retrieved from the working
pool with "Next" and printed/saved/exported.
Patient list Call up patient list (only after confirmation of all expo-
sures).
6.6 Select additional examination
This screen appears after you have clicked on Add. You can schedule
another examination for this patient.

Select additional examination 6.6
Button Meaning
Anatomy: Open list of organs.
Example:
Date: Examination date
Accession Number This number is from the last examination before you
pressed Add . It is generally used in PACS.
You can also
- use this number for the new examination,
- enter a new number.
Confirm Confirm scheduled examination.
Cancel Reject change, close screen.
Add Save additional exposure in the scheduled examination.

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Delete Delete unscheduled examination.


6.7 Control image
6.7 Control image
This image appears after exposure; You can check the image for
• correct positioning of the patient
• motion artefacts
• proper collimation.
After collimation and confirmation the image data outside collimation are delet-
ed. The following warning appears:
WARNING

Control image 6.7
If required Customer Service can delete this window.

Yes:
- confirm collimation
- the image data outside the marked area will be deleted,
- the window disappears
Cancel:
- collimate again
• annotate image
• check exposure data.
The control image is not suitable for medical diagnosis.
WARNING
For further information on collimation, see "Adjusting collima-

tion"(chapter 7.1.13.2).
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

6.8 Functions for image manipulation
6.8 Functions for image manipulation
This screen appears after you have clicked on Toggle Tools . You can ma-
nipulate images as follows:
Working Pool
The image appears here after you have clicked on Next or Repeat. The
image outlined in orange appears magnified on the right.
Image is confirmed (green)
Image repeated (red)

No flag: Image must be processed.
Activate the image by double clicking; it appears magnified on the right.
You can manipulate or confirm it. The images are exported in the se-
quence in which they have been confirmed.

Functions for image manipulation 6.8
Brightness Change the brightness.
This function not only influences the control image but
also the final image and the UNIQUE parameter.
Contrast Change the contrast.
This function not only influences the control image but
also the final image and the UNIQUE parameter.
Reset Reject changes.
Acquisition View selected (organ and view, display only).
Examination Type of examination selected (organ and designation of

side, display only).
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
DICOMViewPos View position (DICOM element, with a new view you

(0018, 5101) have to override the default values. The number is the
DICOM element number, see DICOM Conformance
Statement).
DICOMPatOrient Orientation of patient (DICOM element, with a new
(0020, 0020) view you have to override the default values. The num-
ber is the DICOM element number, see DICOM Con-
formance Statement).
DICOM Laterality Right/left-hand side of body; "None" with individual or-
(0020, 0060) gans.
HCUPos Position (0 … 9) of active image on film with 2 in 1, 3
in 1, ….
"0" = no position selected; printing will take place in the
sequence of confirmation.
HCUScale Printer format:
small (collimation: 35 cm x 43 cm, 2 in 1, film: 35 cm x
43 cm)
medium (collimation: 43 cm x 43 cm, film: 35 cm x 43
cm)
large (collimation: 35 cm x 43 cm, film: 35 cm x 43
cm)
life size (=100%, only with "Advances print" option) or

DICOM print
HCULayout Image layout:
1x1L, 1x1P, … (depending on configuration)
You can only print images from the same ex-
amination on one film.
FilmSize Available film sizes (in cm or inch, as selected by Cus-
tomer Service).

6.9 Opening examination
6.9 Opening examination
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
This screen appears after you have clicked on Open. With this function
you can call up a list of examinations for the patient selected.
Close:
Close window. Alternatively you can select another patient; you can
only select one patient at a time and call up the patient data.
Dis- Meaning
play
1 Name of examination.
2 Number of examination (Acc. Number),
3 Date/Time
4 Number of exposures made.
5 Number of images on local hard disk.
6 Number of confirmed images (only with Storage Commit).
7 Modality type

Selecting 6.10
Customer Service can customize this list according to your require-

ments.
6.10 Selecting
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
This screen appears after you have clicked on Find. With this function
you can narrow down the patient list by entering a search criterion, e.g.
all names beginning with "A". If you enter several search criteria, the
patient data fulfilling all these search criteria are displayed. If a list is
displayed according to search criteria, the selection list is highlighted

red, Full List is highlighted white. Customer Service can customize this
screen according to your requirements. For further information on this
screen, see "Calling up patient data according to search criteria"(chapter
7.1.18).
Last Name Patient's surname.
First Name Patient's first name.

6.10 Selecting
Date of Birth You can enter the date e.g. with the format
DD.MM.YYYY. You must enter the year using four dig-
its.
Sex m - male, f - female, u - unknown
Patient ID Alphanumeric
Doctor Enter referring doctor or ward.
Examined Only the data of patients with exposures are displayed.
Not Examined Only the data of patients without exposures are dis-
played.
All Patients The entire list is displayed.
Stored on The patient data saved on the storage medium are dis-
storage medium played.
Not stored on The patient data not saved on the storage medium are
storage medium displayed.
All Patients All patient data are displayed.
Confirm Find patient data.
Cancel Cancel search, screen disappears.
Full List Display all patient data (full list).
Delete Not active.

Sorted by 6.11
6.11 Sorted by
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
This screen appears after you have clicked on Sorted By:. You can select
your search criteria in a submenu.
Customer Service can customize this list according to your require-
ments.

6.12 Input screen
6.12 Input screen
This screen appears after you have clicked on Enter. You can enter new
patient data (chapter 7.1.5). In the field outlined in black, which can
be accessed by clicking the mouse or , you can enter characters.
Customer Service can customize this screen according to your require-
ments.
Left side of
screen
Date of Birth You can enter the date e.g. with the format DD.MM.YYYY.
You must enter the year using four digits.
Patient ID Patient number, alphanumeric

Input screen 6.12
Confirm Confirm data entered. If you confirm a blank screen, this will
disappear.
Cancel Cancel, screen disappears.
Full List Not active.
Delete Not active.
Right side of
screen
Anatomy: From a submenu you can select an anatomy for examina-
tions.
Date: Date of examination; default: actual date.
Accession Number You can enter an examination number.
Scheduled The list of scheduled examinations is displayed.

Examinations:
Add Add a new examination with a new number to the list.
Modify Replace the current examination by another, the number

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
will stay the same (DICOM, RIS).

Append Replace the current examination by another with a new
number (only in conjunction with MPPS).
Delete Delete activated examinations from the list of scheduled
examinations.

6.13 Selecting gender
6.13 Selecting gender
If you wish to change the gender, in the windows Modify, Enter,

Emergencyor Find, you can either
• enter m (male), f (female) or u (unknown)
or
• click on ; a selection window is displayed.

Selecting anatomical group 6.14
6.14 Selecting anatomical group

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
If you click on Anatomy: in the input screen, a list of all available ana-
tomical groups is displayed.

6.15 Selecting examination
6.15 Selecting examination
When you have selected an anatomy, a list of all assigned examinations

is displayed.
Example:

Scheduled examinations 6.16
6.16 Scheduled examinations

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The examination selected appears after you click on Add in the window
"Scheduled examinations" or double click with the left mouse button.
You can schedule further examinations for the patient selected.

6.17 Change
6.17 Change
This screen appears after you have clicked on Modify. You can change
patient data (chapter 7.1.19).
In the field outlined in black, which can be accessed by clicking the
mouse or , you can enter characters.
ments.
Left side of screen
its.

Change 6.17
Patient ID Patient number, alphanumeric
Confirm Accept changes and close screen.
Cancel Do not accept changes, the screen disappears.
Delete Delete patient data.

You can only delete patient data when no job is being
performed in the background (image processing, print
job, data export, …). With active Storage Commit all
images must be confirmed by the image management
system (normally PACS) before you can delete patient
data.
Right side of screen
Anatomy: From a submenu you can select an anatomy for exami-
nations.

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

Examinations:
Modify Replace the current examination by another, the num-

ber will stay the same (DICOM, RIS).
examinations.

6.18 Emergency
6.18 Emergency
This screen appears after you have clicked on Emergency. You can enter
patient data in the fields outlined with a dark line.
ments.
If you close this window with Confirm , the examination list is displayed
so that you can immediately start the examination (chapter 7.1.21).
Left side of screen

Last Name Patient's surname. A default value, which can be changed
by Customer Service, is displayed here.
First Name Patient's first name. A default value, which can be
changed by Customer Service, is displayed here.
its. An error message appears if you make an incorrect
entry.

Emergency 6.18
Patient ID Patient number. A default value, which can be changed

by Customer Service, is displayed here. This value in-
creases by 1 every time the function is opened.
Confirm Confirm data entered. If you confirm a blank field, this

will disappear.
Cancel Do not accept data, the screen disappears.
Delete Not active.
Right side of screen

Anatomy: From a submenu you can select an anatomy for exami-
nations.

Examinations:
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Modify Replace the current examination by another, the num-

ber will stay the same (DICOM, RIS).
examinations.

6.19 Viewing patient images
This screen appears after you have selected a patient and clicked on
View.
First of all only images are displayed. You can do the following with
each image
• display,
• print.
• stitch, if it is part of a stitching row,
• delete,
• save and export.
For further information see "Handling images" (chapter 7.1.22).

Viewing patient images 6.19
View: View
- Exposures of patient: all images of this patient
- Images of patient: all images of this patient including all
processing
- All exposures: all images
- All images: all images including all processing in the
patient list.
Activation of the last two functions may block
the system for several seconds as there are pos-
sibly a large number of images to open.
Should the volume of data be very large, the sys-
tem may crash. You must then restart the sys-
tem. (chapter 7.1.2)
Images: Number of image displayed and number of all images.
Medium: Medium of image saved/loaded.
Post Select processed image to be saved to/loaded from

storage medium/from CD-R.
Pre Select unprocessed image to be saved to/loaded from
storage medium/from CD-R.
Store Save image on storage medium/CD-R/export to DI-
COM.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Retrieve Load selected image from storage medium/from CD-R.
Delete Delete selected image from storage medium/from CD-

R.
Navigation: Scroll through the patient list.
Previous Patient Select previous patient.
Next Patient Select next patient.
Acquisition The screen shows for the image selected

Information: - type of examination and image number (see below)
- kV
- mAs
- ms
- exposure index
- dose area product
- date of exposure
- time of exposure.
View View or process image selected.
Print Print image selected; a submenu is displayed.
Join individual stitching images.

Stitch
Delete Delete images which have been post-processed and

whose image number does not contain a "0" (see "Ex-
posure counter" below).
Patient list Call up patient list.
Meaning of symbols
on images
Post-images are on the local hard disk.

Pre-image is on the local hard disk.
P
Post-images are on the storage medium.
The pre-image is on the storage medium.

P
The image has been exported to the printer.
The image has been saved.
The image has been discarded.
Image confirmed by PACS via Storage Commit (option-

al).
Neubauer, Andreas 646081: Exposure counter

Pelvis ap 649688: Examination counter
(126;1088;0) 1, 2, …: Processing counter ("0" for original image).

Displaying image (classic) 6.20
6.20 Displaying image (classic)

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
This screen appears after you have clicked on View or double clicked on
the image selected.
It is always the processed image that appears (either the original or the
reprocessed image). If there is no processed image on the hard disk, the
unprocessed image will appear).
Button/Field/Slide Meaning
control
Default The image processing name appears here. An asterisk

shown afterwards indicates that the data have been
changed.
Save Save image processing produced under same name.

control
Save as Save image processing produced.
The following appears
You can enter the name and description of the image

processing here. After you have clicked on Store there
are four options:
• You enter a name which already exists in the (fac-
tory-set) standard image processing system:
- an error message appears
- the name is not accepted.
• You enter a name which does not yet exist:
- the name of the new image processing appears in
the list as user image processing
- the name of the image processing appears on the
film.
• You enter a name which already exists in the user
image processing but has not yet been used for the
routine:
- the image processing is overwritten with the new
data without warning.
• You enter a name which already exists in the user
image processing and has already been used for the
routine (the name is saved after confirming with
"Yes"):
- the image processing is overwritten with the new
data.
Select Select image processing from the list above.

Displaying image (classic) 6.20
control
Ranging Mode: There are three modes depending on the image proc-
essing selected. The mode "Manual" is not normally
used, while the mode "Semi" registers bone and lung
tissue if positioned correctly.
The mode "Auto" registers lung tissue and the abdo-
men. This mode is only suitable for exposures of
the lung.
You can achieve comparable quality with conventional
films by selecting the density value for the region of in-
terest (ROI) and the gamma of the film.
Please bear in mind for the lung:
The abdomen density depends on the patient.
Density types/Gamma control
• Manual (not normally used)
˗ The region of interest is selected manually.
˗ Dose and density correlate with each other.
˗ Exposure errors are not corrected.
• Semi (for bone and lungs)
˗ The anatomical region of interest defined by this
mode is assigned to a density selected using the
"ROI density" slide control.
˗ Exposure errors are corrected.
• Auto (only for lungs)
˗ This mode defines two regions of interest (lung,
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
abdomen) which are subsequently assigned to

the density values selected using the "ROI den-
sity" and "Abdomen density" slide controls.
˗ The density of the abdomen is given a constant
value.
Processing Category
UNIQUE Image processing in UNIQUE mode (UNIQUE option

required).
Classic Image processing in classic mode.
Normalized Produce unprocessed image (UNIQUE option re-

quired).
ROI Density Select the optical density for the region of interest.
Gamma This variable adjusts global contrast so that the image

corresponds to a film image with a corresponding gam-
ma.
Detail Contrast Enhancement This variable influences the image structures. It does not
alter the global contrast but the contrast of the struc-
tures in terms of their environment. When detail con-
trast and gamma are identical, the behavior corresponds

to display on film (if contrast balance = 1 and structure
boost = 0). Unlike structure boost, detail contrast not
only enhances weak but also strong contrast.
Noise Only for lungs! Level of noise reduction produced by
Compensation detail contrast boost.
Unsharp Masking This slide control only appears in Semi mode.
"0": Function switched off.
Positive values: Edge enhancement active.

control
Unsharp Masking Kernel This slide control only appears in Semi mode. This value
relates to kernels in pixel units and defines the size of
image details affected by "Unsharp Masking". 1 pixel
corresponds to 0.143 mm.
Example:
The value 10 means that the contrast of all details small-
er than 1.43 mm is boosted.
Philips recommends:
The functions "Unsharp Masking" and "Unsharp Masking
Kernel": only deliver better image quality in certain cas-
es. Detail boost will be more successful if you use detail
contrast boost.
Overlay:
Curves Overlay following curves for this patient:

(Examples) - density
- contrast
- detail contrast boost
While trying out new processing, you should leave this
function switched on.
Range of histogram analysis

....................................
....................................
.................................... Direct radiation range
....................................
............
Region of interest for lungs and bone
Region of interest for abdomen (only in "Auto-
matic" mode)
Parameter Display processing parameters in image. While trying
out new processing, you should leave this function
switched on.
Create Only active after changes.
Generate new processed image (post-image).
You can then view, print out and save the image.
Delete Delete selected image processing (not possible with
standard image processing or user image processing
with the link "Yes").

Cancel Cancel operation.
The following buttons are active after you have clicked

on View. With this function you can quickly compare
image processing in different images.
< Call up initial image processing.
< Call up previous image processing.

Displaying image + menu 6.21
control
< Call up next image processing.
< Call up last image processing.
6.21 Displaying image + menu

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
This image appears after you have clicked on the image with the right
mouse button.
This image is for viewing only; changes to this image will not influence
printout or saving to DICOM.

6.21 Displaying image + menu
Rotate - 0°
- 90°
- 180°
- 270°
Scale - Fit image to shutter
- Fit image to the width of the screen layout
- Show image with full resolution
Magnify Magnify image.
Show Pre Show unprocessed image.
Invert Invert image (black/white).
Reset Reject changes in this screen.
Save as PNG Save image as PNG file for Customer Service.

Displaying image (UNIQUE) 6.22
6.22 Displaying image (UNIQUE)

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
control
Overlay:

- contrast
- detail contrast boost


6.22 Displaying image (UNIQUE)
control

....................................
....................................
.................................... Direct radiation range
....................................
............
Region of interest for lungs and bone
matic" mode)
switched on.

Semi-automatic mode (UNIQUE) 6.23
6.23 Semi-automatic mode (UNIQUE)
6.23.1 UNIQUE – Standard settings

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
This screen shows image processing with UNIQUE.

Button/Window/ Meaning
Slide control
Density Select the optical density for the region of interest.
Gamma This variable adjusts global contrast so that the image

corresponds to a film image with a corresponding gam-
ma.
Structure Boost Structures whose pixels only diverge slightly from adja-
cent pixels are boosted, the greater this value is. Struc-
tures with low contrast become more visible as they are
boosted more than structures with good contrast.

Slide control
Structure This value defines which structure preference is to be
Preference primarily influenced by "Structure boost". It is thus pos-
sible to specify that primarily fine details or major bone
fractures are to be boosted.
Noise The more structures are boosted, the more the ob-
Compensation server will be bothered by image noise as noise is
particularly prevalent in low-dose areas. To suppress
this phenomenon it is possible to reduce structure
boost in these low-dose areas (light areas) by increasing
the parameter "Noise compensation". If you view a
processed thorax exposure, the noise from the media-
stinum will seem greater than from the adjacent ribs. An
increase in "Noise compensation" reduces the boost of
the smaller structures and thus to a reduction in noise
in the light areas.
Curve These curves influence the general appearance of the
image in terms of global contrast and global brightness.
A changed curve does not directly influence the image
structures (detail contrast); this is brought about by
other parameters. The right choice of the density curve
is a decisive factor for avoiding clipping in black and
white areas.
The following density curves are available for selec-
tion:
SWL: S-Wide-Latitude
SCL: S-Chest-Latitude
LIN: Linear curve
FC: Film-like Chest
FB: Film-like Bones

6.23.2 UNIQUE – Expert settings

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Slide control
Expert settings << The system is in expert mode.
Detail Contrast This variable influences the image structures. It does not
alter the global contrast but the contrast of the struc-
tures in terms of their environment. When detail con-
trast and gamma are identical, the behavior corresponds
to display on film (if contrast balance = 1 and structure

boost = 0). Unlike structure boost, detail contrast not
only enhances weak but also strong contrast.
Contrast Balance This variable influences contrast in terms of local bright-
ness/density.
1: The detail contrast is at its maximum only within the
ROI; the detail contrast is reduced in the light and dark
areas (as on film).
0: The detail contrast of all brightness/density points is
identical (harmonized contrast). You can use the slide
control for infinitely variable adjustment between these
two extremes.

Slide control
W.C. Limit Structures with low contrast (differences in pixel values)
can be increased using the parameter "Structure boost".
W.C. Limit defines what is considered as "weak
contrast" (generally contrast <3% of a decade). This is
not a "precise" definition as the decrease in the boost
towards stronger contrast is not clear-cut.
S.C. Limit At areas with great differences in contrast (e.g. at the
edges of metal implants) contrast boost must be limited
to avoid artefacts. You can use this variable to select the
contrast in % at the area where structure boost is to be
reduced. A value of 7% is generally suitable here.
S.B. Offset S.B. Offset is an additional structure boost regardless of
the structure preference value selected.
Noise Limit This value determines the degree of enhancement com-
pensation in the density area. The values are decadic.
Limits:
- 0.1: Noise compensation only acts on the lowest den-
sity values
- 3.0: Noise compensation acts on all density values
Noise Step This value determines the gamma at the transition be-
tween noise-compensated and non noise-compensated
regions in the dose area.
- 0.1: step-by-step transition (risk of artefacts)
- 2.0: transition in an S-shaped function over 2 decades
Noise Band This value determines the degree of noise compensa-
tion in the spatial frequency range.
• 0.5:
- maximum noise compensation for the finest struc-
tures,
- otherwise no noise compensation.
• 3.0:
– maximum noise compensation for the finest struc-
tures,
– medium noise compensation for medium-sized
structures,
– no noise compensation for the largest structures.
Field 1: Range of histogram analysis for Semi and Automatic
mode.

Slide control
Field 2: Range of histogram analysis for the abdomen (Auto-
matic mode only). Four collimation formats are availa-
ble:
100% Full format (98/98%)
50% Half format (98/50%)
25% Quarter format (25/25%)
20% Gap (20/80%)
Semi-automatic mode: field 1

Automatic mode: field 1 + field 2
Manual mode: no field.
Overlay:
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

- contrast
Direct radiation range
....................................
....................................
.................................... Region of interest for lungs and bone
................................................
matic" mode)

switched on.

6.24 Image processing screen
6.24 Image processing screen
This screen appears when you click on Processing in the patient list.
It shows the data of the images not yet completely processed. The screen
is blank in this example. Philips Medical Systems, November 2006

Image processing screen 6.24
Button/Window Meaning
Delete Delete selected items. The following appears
If you have deleted an image marked with *, you can-

not
- perform further processing,
- print,
- transfer via DICOM,
- save it.
If you have deleted an image marked with **, you can
use View for subsequent processing. All the above func-
tions are active.
Delete All Delete all queue items shown. The following appears
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Help A window with a help text appears.
Exit The window disappears.


6.25 Storage medium
6.25 Storage medium
This screen appears when you click on External Device .

You can use this function to select all devices for which the transfer of
images is to be enabled (with the exception of the directly connected
image printer).
Possible media are:
• Storage medium/CD-R (optional)
• DICOM
To the right of External Device the following messages may appear (green):
• no storage medium
No storage medium loaded; there may be a storage medium in the
drive but it is not loaded (chapter 7.1.22.8).
• loaded
Storage medium loaded.
• loading
Storage medium is being loaded.

Storage medium 6.25
• writing
An image is being loaded to a storage medium or transferred via
DICOM.
• reading
An image is being read from the storage medium. Images cannot be
read from DICOM.
• formatting
The storage medium is being formatted.
• pause (yellow)
You have interrupted the write or read operation with Pause .
• any other error message (red)
Device Here you can select the available media shown to the
left (storage medium, DICOM). The following appears
Status Status of storage medium.
Media Status Storage medium: Usage and number of images.
Device log Information for Customer Service

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Storage Queue The data to be exported/loaded appear here.
Pause Stop storage of data selected.
Delete Delete selected items.
Delete All Delete all pending queue items.
Load Load storage medium.
Unload Log off storage medium and eject.
Format Reformat storage medium. In this case all data on

the storage medium are erased! (chapter
7.1.22.10)
Read Index ... Call up patient list from storage medium.
VERIFY Start DICOM query for mode selected.

DICOM confirmation: Check whether the DICOM
function for the mode is active.
Status field
- green: READY
- yellow: WAIT
- red: NO CONNECTION

6.26 Print
6.26 Print
This screen appears when you click on HCU.

It shows
• the layout of the current image (maximized),
• name, ID and date of birth of the patient selected (top right and in
the current image below),
• all images for the selected patient (right); if there are more images
than can be shown, you can scroll through them.
Button Meaning
8INX10IN Select film / paper size
Portrait Select film / paper format (portrait, landscape).
blue film 8-bit Select film / paper type.

2x1P Select print template.
Fuji7000 Select printer.

Print 6.26
Button Meaning
1 of 1 Counter shows
• the page number of the preview
• the numbers of the current pages in the composer.
Print film.
Print more than one film.
Add film.
Delete film.
Delete selected element from the preview page; only active if

the selected element can be deleted.
Go to next page; only active if there are two or more pages in
the composer.
Go to previous page; only active if there are two or more pages
in the composer.
Exit Close HCU screen.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Open text and image editor.
Reduce image by 1%.
Magnify image by 1%.
Reduce image by 5%.
Magnify image by 5%.
Fit image in frame.
Show image 100%.
Apply same Use the same scale for all images on the film.
scale
Link images Applies changes on one image to all images.
Scaling value
Scale image.

6.26 Print
Button Meaning
Move image up to left.
Move image up.
Move image up to right.
Move image left.
Center image.
Move image right.
Move image down to left.
Move image down.
Move image down to right.
Rotate image 90°.
Rotate image -90°.
Return image to original state.
Extras Open the template editor.
Edit templates.
Show region of interest.
Move image into top left corner.
Move image up to top border/align at top border.
Move image into top right corner.
Move image to left border/align at left border.
Center image.
Move image to right border/align at right border.
Move image into bottom left corner.

Move image down to bottom border/align at bottom

border.
Move image into bottom right corner.

Print 6.26
The template editor

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

6.26 Print
Button Meaning
Shows the geometric data of the template editor layout.
The values are in 1/1000 increments of the print medium format.
+
• Change: alternate between portrait and landscape

• Top border: distance between image and top border
• Left border: distance between image and left border
• Right border: distance between image and right border
• Bottom border: distance between image and bottom border
• Horizontal gap: distance between the images in landscape
• Vertical gap: distance between the images in portrait
• Multi-attendance behavior: not active with PCR
• Auto-Rotation: select template orientation (portrait/land-

scape)
• Accept: confirm changes
• Cancel: cancel changes
Edit template changes

Print 6.26
Button Meaning
Shows the text editor
The values are in 1/1000 increments of the viewport.
+
or new view-
port
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
• X-Pos: horizontal positioning of the upper left corner of the

text box
• Y-Pos: vertical positioning of the upper left corner of the
text box
• Width: width of the text box
• Height: height of the text box
• Text alignment horizontal: horizontal positioning of the text
in the text box
• Text alignment vertical: vertical positioning of the text in the
text box
• Select Stringgroup: contains a list of all preconfigured DI-
COM data groups
• Preview: composition of the selected DICOM data group
• Accept: confirm changes
• Cancel: cancel changes
Cancel template changes

Close Close template editor

Page-layouts Displays the possible layouts you can apply to the film.
Viewport-lay- Displays the possible layouts you can apply to the selected view-
outs port.
Apply selected layout to the selected viewport.
For the system manager only.
Change selected viewport.
Delete selected element from the list.

6.26 Print
Button Meaning
Add change to the list (save).
Create new, empty layout.
Reduce all viewports on the film vertically and add a new view-
port.
Reduce selected viewport vertically and add a new viewport.
Reduce all viewports on the film horizontally and add a new

viewport.
Reduce area for the selected viewport horizontally and add a
new viewport.
Increase area for the selected viewport toward the top step by
step.
Increase area for the selected viewport toward the bottom step
by step.
Reduce area for the selected viewport from the top step by step
to allow space for text outside the image.
Reduce the selected viewport from the bottom step by step to
allow space for text outside the image.
Magnify viewport, line or text box of an image area.
Reduce viewport, line or text box of an image area.
Magnify viewport, column or text box of an image area.
Reduce viewport, column or text box of an image area.
The text box editor

Appears when you click on a text box in the template editor.

Print 6.26
Button Meaning
Select more than one text box.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Align text boxes to the left.
Center text boxes.
Align text boxes to the right.
Merge text boxes.
Separate text boxes step by step.
Merge text boxes step by step.
Move text box toward top left step by step; in small

increments using Ctrl key.
Move text box toward top step by step; in small incre-
ments using Ctrl key.
Move text box toward top right step by step; in small
Move text box toward left step by step; in small incre-

ments using Ctrl key.
Move text box toward right step by step; in small in-
crements using Ctrl key.
Move text box toward bottom left step by step; in small
Move text box toward bottom step by step; in small

6.27 Hard copy unit calibration
Button Meaning
Move text box toward bottom right step by step; in
small increments using Ctrl key.
When used in conjunction with one of the 8 direction
keys, this button places the text box at the correspond-
ing border or in the corresponding corner.
6.27 Hard copy unit calibration
This screen appears after you have clicked on System (in the Patient list),
Service, Calibrate.
You can use this function to calibrate a film printout from the laser
printer.
A help text appears on the left of the screen. For this purpose use
Previous Page, Next Page.
With the slide controls you can adjust the density measured on the test
film at the appropriate point.
For further information on this screen see "Calibrate laser print-
er" (chapter 7.1.25).

Hard copy unit calibration 6.27
If the extended print option is installed via EasyVision RAD, you

must calibrate EasyVision RAD.
Button Meaning
Return Call up previous on-screen display.
Calibrate: Select gray levels or scale for calibration.
Select Print Device: Select printer.
Printmedia: Select print medium.
Previous Page Open previous page of help text for calibration.
Next Page Open next page of help text for calibration.
Produce Generate an uncalibrated image for calibration.

uncalibrated Image
Print Print an image to check calibration.

verification Image
Update HCU Confirm input data on conclusion of all measurements on

Calibration the uncalibrated image.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

6.28 System menu
6.28 System menu
This screen appears when you click on System.

It informs you about the system status and is required to switch off the
system.
System Status of You can call up the system components to enquire
about their status. This information is intended for Cus-
tomer Service.
Last Calibration Date of last detector calibration.
Detector Status Status of detector calibration.
Last Assurance Date of last quality assurance.
Assurance Status Information about next consistency check:

valid: no constancy check due
out of date: constancy check due
Service Other functions are stored here (password-protected).

Service tools 6.29
Logout "Shut down" software or restart (chapter 7.1.2ff ).
6.29 Service tools

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The functions available here are primarily intended for Customer Serv-
ice. If you need to access them as the user, you will see an explicit message
to this effect in the control panel.
6.30 Clinical quality control – Exposure statistics

This function is only available with the corresponding license.

6.30 Clinical quality control – Exposure statistics
Field Meaning
Time range Time period of statistical survey.
Image Statis- Display of statistical data.
tics
Image data ta- Display of individual exposures with data.
ble
Rejected Display of rejected exposures.
Confirmed Display of confirmed exposures.
All Display of all exposures.

Percentage Percentage of exposures in display selected above.
Images count Absolute number of exposures in display selected above.

Clinical quality control – Exposure statistics 6.30
Field Meaning
Top 20 topic Filter criteria, e.g. reasons, operator, organ etc.
Example:
Add Add to Top 20 topic elements.

Delete Delete from Top 20 topic elements.
Export Export data to CD or USB or the hard disk.
Exit Exit function.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

6.31 Clinical quality control – Exposure data
6.31 Clinical quality control – Exposure data
Field Meaning
Image date Date of exposure.
Rejected Exposure repeated.
Reason Reason for repetition.
Operator User responsible.
Organ Organ forming subject of exposure.

Columns Open function to configure columns.
Statistics Display statistics as an Excel list.
Help Display help text.

Contents
7 Operation ........................................................ 7-5
7.1 The system ........................................................................ 7-5

7.1.1 For your guidance ............................................... 7-5
7.1.2 Switch on system ................................................ 7-5
7.1.3 Logging on ......................................................... 7-6
7.1.4 Switching off system ........................................... 7-7
7.1.5 Entering patient data .......................................... 7-8
7.1.6 Select patient .................................................... 7-11
7.1.7 Starting examination ......................................... 7-11
7.1.8 Selecting tube assembly ..................................... 7-11
7.1.9 Positioning tube assembly ................................. 7-13
7.1.10 Positioning patient ............................................ 7-13
7.1.11 Adjusting exposure data, if necessary ................. 7-14
7.1.12 Releasing an exposure ....................................... 7-15
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.1.13 Adjusting control image .................................... 7-15

7.1.14 Making next exposure without immediate
confirmation ..................................................... 7-16
7.1.15 Making control images ..................................... 7-17
7.1.16 Repeating exposure ........................................... 7-17
7.1.17 After exposure ................................................... 7-18
.......................................................................... 7-18
7.1.19 Modifying input data ........................................ 7-20
7.1.20 Deleting patient data ........................................ 7-21
7.1.21 With an emergency ........................................... 7-22
7.1.22 Handling images ............................................... 7-23
7.1.23 Calibrating monitor .......................................... 7-38
7.1.24 Calibrating detector .......................................... 7-40
7.1.25 Calibrating laser printer .................................... 7-42
7.1.26 Printing ............................................................ 7-46
7.1.27 Stitching ........................................................... 7-57
7.1.28 Digital cassette exposures .................................. 7-71
7.1.29 Clinical quality control ..................................... 7-73
7.2 The BuckyDiagnost CS 2/4 ceiling suspension units ....... 7-77
7.2.1 Movements ....................................................... 7-77

7.2.2 Tips to easily position the tube assembly with the
control grip ....................................................... 7-80
7.3 The manual collimator .................................................... 7-81
7.3.2 Measuring the SID ........................................... 7-81
7.3.3 Collimating ...................................................... 7-81
7.4 The automatic collimator ................................................ 7-82
7.4.1 Cassette size sensing .......................................... 7-82

Contents
7.4.3 SID display ....................................................... 7-84

7.4.4 Collimating ...................................................... 7-86
7.5 The extended collimator .................................................. 7-87
7.5.1 Select auxiliary .................................................. 7-87
7.5.2 Select APR program .......................................... 7-88
7.6.1 Operation of all configurations ......................... 7-88
7.6.2 Operation of the basic configuration ................. 7-89
7.6.3 Operation with AEC, without APR .................. 7-91
7.6.4 Operation with APR, without AEC .................. 7-93
7.6.5 APR records ...................................................... 7-93
7.6.6 Operation with AEC and APR ......................... 7-97
7.6.7 Tomography ................................................... 7-102
7.6.8 The dose display ............................................. 7-106
7.7 The vertical Bucky BuckyDiagnost VS .......................... 7-107
7.7.1 Moving unit ................................................... 7-107
7.7.2 Changing a grid .............................................. 7-111
7.7.3 Changing a cassette ......................................... 7-113
7.7.4 The stretch grip .............................................. 7-115
7.7.6 Collimating .................................................... 7-117
7.8 The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact ....... 7-118
7.8.1 Moving unit ................................................... 7-118
7.8.2 Changing a grid .............................................. 7-123
7.8.3 The stretch grip .............................................. 7-125
7.8.5 Collimating .................................................... 7-127
7.9 The wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM (horizontal) .......... 7-128
7.9.1 Moving unit ................................................... 7-128
7.9.2 Changing a grid .............................................. 7-134
7.9.3 The stretch grip .............................................. 7-136
7.9.5 Collimating .................................................... 7-138
7.10 The mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS .................... 7-139
7.10.1 Movements ..................................................... 7-139
7.11 The patient tables DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF ................. 7-142
7.11.1 For your guidance ........................................... 7-142
7.11.3 Adjusting SID and collimating with Bucky
exposures ........................................................ 7-143
7.11.4 Cassette size sensing ........................................ 7-144

7.11.5 Inserting and removing a cassette .................... 7-145
7.11.6 Changing a grid .............................................. 7-147
7.11.7 Setting center position .................................... 7-149
7.12 The patient table Single Sided Table TH-S ................... 7-149
7.12.1 Safety instructions ........................................... 7-149
7.12.3 Other functions .............................................. 7-150
7.12.4 In the event of a collision ................................ 7-151

Contents

....................................................................................... 7-151
7.13.1 Safety precautions ........................................... 7-151
7.13.2 Applying/releasing brakes ............................... 7-151
7.13.3 Moving unit ................................................... 7-152
7.14 The patient transport table TRAUMOB X .................... 7-153
patient ............................................................ 7-153
7.14.2 Inserting table top ........................................... 7-153
7.14.3 Moving unit ................................................... 7-153
7.14.4 Operating brakes ............................................ 7-154
7.14.5 Raising/lowering table top .............................. 7-154
7.15 The plate reader DigitalDiagnost Compano .................. 7-155
7.15.1 Switching ON/OFF ........................................ 7-155
7.15.4 Performing primary erasure ........................... 7-161
7.16.1 Switching ON/OFF ........................................ 7-162
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.16.4 Performing primary erasure ............................ 7-170

7.17 Exposures with plate cassettes ........................................ 7-172
7.17.1 Exposure parameters ....................................... 7-172
7.17.2 Positioning the cassette ................................... 7-172
7.17.3 Handling cassettes and image plates ................ 7-174
7.18 Tracking ........................................................................ 7-175
7.18.1 Tracking for the SID ...................................... 7-175
7.18.2 Tracking for the image receptor ...................... 7-176
7.18.3 Changing auxiliaries ........................................ 7-176

Contents

7 Operation
7.1 The system
7.1.1 For your guidance

Operations you need to perform are marked with a little black triangle
and are
• described with text and symbols and
• possibly illustrated with drawings.
Controls (buttons, keys, levers etc.) highlighted in black or arrows

pointing to controls indicate that you must operate these controls.
Example:
▶ Raise/lower tube assembly (yellow).
LED lights up when locked in place.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The black button indicates that you should press it.
Example:
▶ Select emergency examination.
The arrow indicates that you should click on this button.
7.1.2 Switch on system
Do not switch the system off again without having "shut it down proper-
ly" (chapter 7.1.4).
WARNING
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Operation 7-5

7.1 The system
▶ Switch on system
• at the generator control desk
• at the PC
Hilfe Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F 11 F12 Druck Rollen Pause Ð +

• on the keyboard (only with SUN Ultra Sparc 10).
Stop Wieder- ! " $ $ % & / ( ) ) ? Einfg Pos 1 Bild Num :
Ð x Ð
holen
1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 { 8 [ ]9 0 } § \
^
Eigen- ZurŸck- Q W E R T Z U I O P † * Entf Ende Bild 7 8 9 +

schaften nehmen
@ + ~ Pos 1 Bild
V order - Kopie-
A S D F G H J K L … € ' 4 5 6
grund ren
; ' # `
… ffne n Ein-
setzen
> Y X C V B N M ; : _ 1 2 3 Enter
< | m , . - Ende Bild
Suchen Aus- Strg Alt ¨ ¨ Com Alt 0 ,

schnei- pose Graph
den Einfg Entf
The start window appears.
7.1.3 Logging on
For logon there are five different access rights which may require an
individual password to be entered:
Level of access Name of user Password Authorized
rights user
1. sabre not necessary Normal user
2. emergency not necessary Normal user
3. service necessary
4. install necessary Philips Customer
Service and exter-
nal customer serv-
ice for installation

and maintenance
5. rservice necessary External customer
service, remote di-
agnosis
The start window appears after switch-on.
7-6 Operation DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

The system 7.1
▶ Enter a password if necessary.

OK ▶ Confirm password.
The patient list appears.
▶ After having started up the system each time, remove the
connecting cable (USB cable) of the barcode reader and re-
connect.
The barcode reader will then function perfectly.
7.1.4 Switching off system

A diagram for the switch-off procedure can be found in the appendix.
▶ Call up patient list.
▶ System Click on this.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Logout Click on this.
Switch the system off

at the generator control desk

7.1 The system
Hilfe Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F 11 F12 Druck Rollen Pause Ð +
on the keyboard.
Stop Wieder- ! " $ $ % & / ( ) ) ? Einfg Pos 1 Bild Num :
Ð x Ð
holen
1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 { 8 [ ]9 0 } § \
^
Eigen- ZurŸck- Q W E R T Z U I O P † * Entf Ende Bild 7 8 9 +

schaften nehmen
@ + ~ Pos 1 Bild
V order - Kopie-
A S D F G H J K L … € ' 4 5 6
grund ren
; ' # `
… ffne n Ein-
setzen
> Y X C V B N M ; : _ 1 2 3 Enter
< | m , . - Ende Bild
Suchen Aus- Alt ¨ ¨ Com Alt 0 ,

schnei- pose Graph
den Einfg Entf
Switch system back on: (chapter 7.1.2)
7.1.5 Entering patient data

You have the option of entering patient data in five different ways:
1 2a 2b 2c 3
Manually Automatically Automatically Automatically Emergency patient
from RIS, if back- from RIS via Work- from RIS via
ground Query is list Query Patienten Query
installed: then
patient name comes
in automatically
Insert patient name Patient name comes Press Press Insert patient name
manually in automatically ÓWorklist Query Ò ÓPatient QueryÒ
Fill in at least
one element
Add examination Add examination
New entry in New entry in New entry in

patient list patient list patient list
Select patient from Select patient from Select patient from

patient list patient list patient list
Start examination Start examination Start examination Start examination Start examination

The system 7.1
1 Manual
▶ Enter Click on this.
▶ Enter patient data; correct with .
▶
Activate next field with , or the mouse.
▶ Select examination;
repeat this selection as required for further examinations (double
click).
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Confirm examination:
Confirm Click on this;
a blank field will appear for the next patient.
▶ Enter data for the next patient or

▶ End input: Cancel;

the Enter window disappears.
2 Automatic
The prerequisite is that your system is connected to an RIS (optional).
2a
If "Background-Query" is installed, the patient data are automatically
transferred. Customer Service can program the time intervals for auto-
matic updating.

7.1 The system
2b
▶ Click on this;
Worklist Query
the Patient list appears.
2c (alternative to 2b)
▶ Patient Query Click on this.
▶ Fill in at least one field and confirm.
▶ Wait ….

The system 7.1
7.1.6 Select patient

With the mouse.
7.1.7 Starting examination

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Select patient in the patient list, click on Start Exam ; the list shows
one or more examinations. Factory-set applications are marked
with "*".
2.
1.
▶ Select additional examination as required: click on Add .

7.1.8 Selecting tube assembly

(if the system is equipped with a second integrated tube assembly (op-
tional)).

7.1 The system
Risk of collision
Park the tube assembly for the wall stand before switching on tomography. This
will avoid any collision.
WARNING
Select the required tube assembly

• at the PC,
• at the generator control desk or
• at the ceiling suspension unit.
At the PC or generator control desk automatically select the tube as-

sembly assigned with the auxiliary.
On the PC
Select the tube assembly for the table.
Select the tube assembly for the wall stand.

2
On the generator control desk

2
On the ceiling suspension unit

The following applies for selection of the auxiliary on the ceiling sus-
pension unit:
• Select "Table" ( ) or "Tomo" ( ) on the table tube assem-
bly:
The table tube assembly and the detector in the table are activated,
the wall stand tube assembly and the detector in the wall stand re-
main inactive.

The system 7.1
The following appears on the table tube assembly "TUBE NOT

ACTIVE, SELECT AUX".
• Select "free exposure" ( ) on the table tube assembly:
The table tube assembly is activated, the wall stand tube assembly
and the detector in the wall stand remain inactive.
The following appears on the wall tube assembly "TUBE NOT AC-
TIVE, SELECT WORKSTATION".
• Select "wall stand" ( ) on the table tube assembly:
The wall tube assembly and the detector in the wall stand are acti-
vated, the table tube assembly and the detector in the table remain
inactive.
ACTIVE, SELECT WORKSTATION".
• If you select "Tomo" ( ), "Table" ( ) on the wall tube as-
sembly or "Wall stand" ( ) on the table tube assembly:
No reaction as the auxiliary selected is not available for this tube
assembly:
The following appears: "REGISTRATION DEVICE NOT
AVAILABLE".
• On the wall tube assembly select "free exposure" ( ):
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The wall tube assembly is activated (LED lights up), the table tube
assembly and the detector in the table remain inactive.
ACTIVE, SELECT WORKSTATION".
7.1.9 Positioning tube assembly

To find out how to position the tube assembly refer to chapter 7.2.1.
7.1.10 Positioning patient

▶ Collimate!
You can alter the format of the radiation field.
Keep collimation to a minimum to avoid unnecessary radia-
tion exposure and to ensure optimum image quality.

7.1 The system
1 The system is ready for exposure when

• the green Ready lamp lights up (1) and
• the field is green (2).
If "ready for exposure" is not displayed, see the appendix for a solution:
• Messages on the monitor
• Messages in control grip display
• Messages in generator control desk display.
Please note:
• Should the connection between the workstation and the X-ray sys-
tem be interrupted, the X-ray system will disconnect from the
workstation after approx. 1 min. (green "ready for exposure" not
displayed at workstation). In this case, exposures with the free ex-
posure technique and non-digital auxiliary are possible. The auxiliary
"Free Technique" must be selected on the generator.
• It is possible that different auxiliaries will be shown on the worksta-
tion and the generator. In this case, the valid display is shown on the
generator.
2
7.1.11 Adjusting exposure data, if necessary

With the patient data you automatically select the right APR program.
This ensures that the right exposure data are selected. They appear in
the display of the generator control desk.
You can change the data of the buttons marked black; all changes are
shown on the display.
Do not press APR buttons as these functions are automatically oper-
ated by the computer.

The system 7.1
7.1.12 Releasing an exposure

▶ Release exposure.
The control image will appear after a few seconds. You can check
the image quality and the positioning of the patient, and you can
adjust the control image (see below).
▶ Adjust collimation if necessary (chapter 7.1.13.2)

• Adjust collimation: left mouse button
• Add anchor points: middle mouse button
• Delete anchor points: right mouse button
Please bear in mind that you may lose image data during col-
limation.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
If necessary, make other exposures of the same patient:

▶ "Next", "Confirm" or "Repeat".
▶ Position the patient etc. (see above).
7.1.13 Adjusting control image
7.1.13.1 Rotating/mirroring image

▶ Rotate, Mirror Select this.

7.1 The system
7.1.13.2 Adjusting collimation

You can change the collimation of the control image by clicking and
dragging on the anchor points.
• Add (circular) anchor point: Move the cursor to anywhere on the
frame and press the middle mouse button.
• Delete (circular) anchor point: Move the cursor to the anchor point
to be deleted and press the right mouse button. The anchor point
disappears, and the two adjacent points are connected.
7.1.13.3 Labeling image

You can position image labels such as "R" or "pa" using the left mouse
button.
Philips recommends:
Use the lead type to flag the pages.
The frame is normally pink. However, if there is an image label outside
this frame, a new frame (yellow) enclosing this label will appear. This
yellow frame is definitive for scaling and export of the image.
Philips recommends:
Always position image labels so that the yellow and pink frame coincide.
7.1.14 Making next exposure without immediate confirmation

▶ NextClick on this;
during the routine examination the next exposure will be auto-
matically selected.
▶ Continue with positioning of the patient if necessary (chapter

7.1.10).

The system 7.1
7.1.15 Making control images

You can make control images in two different ways:
• First generate …
Exposure Next Exposure Next etc.
Working
pool
• … and then manipulate
Shutter Shutter Shutter
Rotation Confirm Rotation Confirm Rotation Confirm
Label Label Label
Working
pool
or
• perform all steps one after the other.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Shutter Shutter
Exposure Rotation Confirm Exposure Rotation Confirm etc.
Label Label
7.1.16 Repeating exposure

The image of a repeated exposure replaces that of the original exposure.
The original exposure is not transferred to the printer or PACS!
▶ RejectClick on this.
The exposure is repeated.
A (configurable) list of reasons for rejection of the exposure ap-
pears. Select a reason.
The current exposure is
• not printed,
• not exported,
• or saved in "Clinical quality control" (only if the license is
available) (chapter 7.1.29).

7.1 The system
7.1.17 After exposure

▶ Confirm the last image.
▶ Open patient list for next patient: Click on Patient list.

▶ Find Click on this.

The system 7.1
▶ You can now enter your search criterion in any field. If you enter
several search criteria, the patient data fulfilling all these search
criteria are displayed. If a list is displayed according to search
criteria, the selection list is displayed in pink,
The functions Not Examined and All Patients are used most frequently.
▶ Confirm entry.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

7.1 The system
Call up entire list:

▶ Find Click on this.
▶ Full List Click on this.
7.1.19 Modifying input data

▶ Call up patient list, select patient.
▶ Modify Click on this.

The system 7.1
Modify examination data

▶ Select examination.
Modify patient data

▶ Edit with .
▶
Activate next field with , or the mouse.
▶ Complete modifying process.

If Cancel is pressed, the new data will not be accepted.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.1.20 Deleting patient data

Please bear in mind that the images are deleted along with the data.
You cannot delete patient data while ongoing operations have not been
completed (storage, printing etc.).
▶ Call up patient list, select patient.
▶ Modify Click on this.

7.1 The system
▶ Delete Click on this.
▶ Yes Click on this.
7.1.21 With an emergency

As no patient data are required with an emergency, you can immediately
select an examination from the list of examinations.
▶ Emergency Click on this.
▶ Enter available data.

▶ Select region of interest.
Default values are used for the name and patient ID.

The system 7.1
▶ Select examination;
repeat this selection as required for further examinations (double
mouse click).
▶ Confirm examination:
Confirm Click on this.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.1.22 Handling images
7.1.22.1 What you can do with images

With images you can do the following
• display as an overview (chapter 7.1.22.2)
• print again (chapter 7.1.22.3)
• view individually (chapter 7.1.22.4)
• save or export (chapter 7.1.22.11)
• delete from storage medium or from CD-R (chapter 7.1.22.13)
• delete from local hard disk (chapter 7.1.22.14)
• reload from storage medium or from CD-R (chapter 7.1.22.15)
and you can generate

• processed images again (chapter 7.1.22.5).
7.1.22.2 Displaying overview of images

The images are not suitable for diagnosis.
Whatever you want to do with the images – you first have to perform
the following sequence of steps:

7.1 The system

▶ Select patient,
View Click on this.
2.
1.
This screen is the starting screen for all other steps when handling
images.
You will find a list of all symbols which may appear in the images in the
appendix (chapter 11.11).
▶ Display image:
double click on the image.
7.1.22.3 Printing the image

via EasyVision
You can print out the image again with different processing. The proc-
essing specified is the processing you used to acquire the image.
▶ Select image.
2.
1.
▶ Print Click on this.

The system 7.1
▶ Select print format:

• life
• large
• medium
• small,
▶ Confirm printing;
all images from the screen are printed on one or more films.
Local printing
See "Printing" (chapter 7.1.26).
7.1.22.4 Viewing individual image

▶ Display image.
▶ Specify the detail with a frame:
Move the green frame to the required position on the left of the
screen. The content of the frame appears magnified on the right.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Call up the following functions by clicking in the magnified image with

the right mouse button.
Rotate - 0°
- 90°
- 180°
- 270°
Scale - Fit image to shutter
- Fit image to the width of the screen layout

- Show image with full resolution
Magnify Magnify image.
Show Pre Show unprocessed image.
Invert Invert image (black/white).

7.1 The system
Reset Reject changes in this screen.
Save as PNG Save image as PNG file for Customer Service (operator
has no access to this).
Showing another viewport

• With the left mouse button click on the green frame (if active) and
move
or
• with the left mouse button click in the image and move
or
• use the scroll bar.
Magnifying glass
• Switch between "Normal display" and "Extended contrast":
Position the cursor in the magnified detail and press the middle
mouse button.
• Change detail:
Click with the left mouse button in the white triangle at the bottom
right. Hold the button down and drag with the mouse.
7.1.22.5 Re-generating a processed image

▶ Display image.
▶ Select the processing you require. Click on Select .

The system 7.1
▶ Select processing.
1. 2.
▶ CreateClick on this.
The processed image appears on the left of the screen after a few
seconds.
In the field next to Processing you will see the number of the image
to be processed.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.1.22.6 Creating and changing new image processing

You should create new image processing if you
• are not happy with the existing processing,
• require image processing that highlights certain details.
Please bear in mind that unsatisfactory images may also be the result
of a poorly adjusted laser printer/viewing monitor.
To prevent you from mistakenly trying to compensate for the pear ad-
justment of a laser printer/viewing station by adjusting image process-
ing, please check the following:
• Is the most recent calibration of the laser printer still valid?
• Is the calibration status of the laser printer/viewing station "GOOD"
or at least "OK"? (chapter 7.1.25). If not: Notify Customer Service.
• Are the test images from the laser printer error-free? If not: Notify
Customer Service.
Experience has shown that good standard processing shows all details
in adequate quality and special processing does not reveal any other
structures not previously visible.

You cannot adjust or delete standard processing.
If you nevertheless wish to create new image processing, proceed as fol-
lows:

7.1 The system
▶ Select image.
▶ View: Select this or double click on the image you want to modify.
▶ Open screen for selection of processing.
▶ From the list of standard processing, select the processing that

comes closest to your requirements.
Meaning of the abbreviations:
- bone …: bone (classic image processing)
1. 2. - che …: lungs (classic image processing)
- UB …: bone (UNIQUE image processing)
- UC …: lungs (UNIQUE image processing)
- NA …:
• USA: Abbreviation for North America (UNIQUE)
• Rest of World: New Algorithm (UNIQUE)
▶ Create Click on this.

The system 7.1
▶ Once you have found an image processing that corresponds to

your requirements, you should give it a new name before making
any other changes, add a comment if necessary and then save with
Save as.
Comment:
wrist, hand, finger all viewsdd
▶ Fill in the Comment and File name fields.
File name: NA_foot_latddd
▶ You can now change image processing as wished. You will get an
initial impression of the effect of the slide controls if you click on
Create.
For final assessment of the image processing, Philips recommends

printing the last iteration steps on film with Print or using DICOM
for transfer to a screen that is suitable for diagnosis. During as-
sessment you are helped by the functions Show curves and
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Show Param. .
If you are using a layout provided by Philips for the film, a text
line at the bottom left in the film indicates the current positions
of the slide controls.
If you have found an image processing that corresponds to your
requirements, you should check this by testing it on some other
exposures and patients. Customer Service can program "your"
image processing as routine image processing.
The following table shows the relationship between the type of image
processing and the options available to the operator for influencing this:
Image processing delete change
Standard no no
created by operator, not routine image proc- yes yes
essing
created by operator, routine image processing no only with
password

7.1 The system
7.1.22.7 Returning to normal working mode

▶ View Click on this.
▶ Patient list Click on this.
7.1.22.8 Inserting and loading storage medium or CD-R

The CD-R is used according to its formatting.
Only use CD-Rs with UV protection.
WARNING
▶ Insert storage medium.

▶ External Device Click on this.

The system 7.1
▶ Medium: Select this (1.).

If the status indicator (3.) is yellow or red, a storage medium is
defective or not formatted.
Load Click on this (2.).
1.
3.
2.
▶ Exit function.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.1.22.9 Adding content of storage medium or CD-R to the patient

list
(only with "barcode reader" option)
▶ Load storage medium.

7.1 The system
▶ Click on this;
Read Index ...
the Patient list of the storage medium appears.
▶ Select images.
▶ Retrieve Click on this.

▶ Transfer images to the patient list.
▶ Exit function.

The system 7.1
7.1.22.10 Formatting storage medium
Formatting deletes all data on the storage medium.
WARNING
▶ Load storage medium.

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Medium: Select this


7.1 The system
▶ Format Select this
▶ After clicking on Yes you can no longer cancel the process. For-
Are you sure? matting a storage medium takes several minutes – depending on
the storage medium. You can still carry on working normally.
Yes No
▶ Leave function: Exit.

The storage medium is formatted in the background, the com-
puter may run slightly slower.
▶ You do not wish to perform formatting: Cancel.

The system 7.1
7.1.22.11 Saving image to an external medium or transferring image

to an external medium (optional)
▶ Check that the CD is loaded (chapter 7.1.22.8).
Please bear in mind that the DICOM standard is only defined
for processed images. With DICOM you should therefore only
save processed images ("post-images").
▶ Select medium
You can
• save one processed image of this patient:
- select image with left mouse button
• save several processed images of this patient:
- select images with ctrl + left mouse button
• re-generate a processed image to be printed out or saved later
on (chapter 7.1.22.5).
▶ Store Click on this.

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.1.22.12 Saving image to a USB stick

Special access rights are required for this function.
▶ Activate the image you want to save.
▶ Click on image.
▶ Select "transfer drive" as the target.

▶ Insert the USB stick.
▶ Select "USB" in the service tool.

7.1 The system
7.1.22.13 Deleting image from storage medium

▶ Select image.
7.1.22.14 Deleting a reprocessed image from the local hard disk

You can only delete reprocessed images from the local hard disk but not
the first original image (suffix "0").
▶ Select one image.
Click with the right mouse button
or
select several images:
Click with Shift + the right mouse button.
7.1.22.15 Reloading image from storage medium or from CD-R

(optional)
Prerequisites
You can only reload an image from a CD if
• the relevant patient name is not included in the patient list,
• the CD is inserted,
• the CD is loaded,
shows that the image is available on the CD. Patient records from the
optical disk are unavailable for X-ray exposures.
The description in the window above will help you in identifying im-
ages.

The system 7.1
▶ Select storage medium.
▶ Retrieve Click on this.

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.1.22.16 Unloading storage medium or CD-R
Make sure that the opening of the drive is not blocked.
WARNING


7.1 The system
▶ Select storage medium and click on Unload.

• If the status indicator is yellow, storage, loading or deletion is
still underway.
• If Read Index ... was active, the normal patient list will reappear
after unloading.
1. • The storage medium is output.
• The Media Status line shows the remaining capacity of the CD
and the number of images.
2.
▶ Exit function.
7.1.23 Calibrating monitor

Special access rights are required for this.
To ensure that the image on the operator’s console is similar to that with
PACS or as a printout, you should calibrate the monitor.
System ▶ Click on this.

Service ▶ .The service tool appears.
Display Calibration ▶ Click on this.

The system 7.1
The calibration screen appears:
▶ With a photometer measure the brightness of the monitor in the

middle of the screen and enter the measurement in the high-
lighted line on the left under Calibration.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
After entering the last value

Apply Calibration ▶ confirm calibration.
The verification screen appears:
▶ With a photometer measure the brightness of the monitor in the

middle of the screen and enter in the highlighted line on the right
under Verification.
▶ Select, measure, enter next value etc.
After entering the last value

7.1 The system
Verification Apply ▶ Click on this.

Ready lights up red.
Red: Value distribution before calibration

Green: Value distribution after calibration
Save ▶ Save data.
The monitor is calibrated.
Exit ▶ Exit function at top left of screen.
Restart ▶ The data is accepted.
7.1.24 Calibrating detector

Philips recommends calibrating the detector of each auxiliary (tomog-
raphy unit, patient table, wall stand) about once a month, however at
the latest when the following message appears:
Calibration of the detector should be performed.
Last calibration: <Date>
Calibration will take between 20 and 60 minutes depending on the
configuration. For calibration you require the 21 mm Al added filter
supplied.
The calibration sequence is as follows:

1. Offset (without radiation)
2. Gain (Steps 1 … 9)
3. Pixel (Steps 1 … 9)
Proceed as follows:

The system 7.1

▶ System Click on this.
▶ Service Click on this.

▶ Image Quality Click on this.
The calibration template appears.
▶ Gain Calibration Select this for the relevant auxiliary.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Start Exam Select this; the following appears
Before the first exposure you must

• remove the grid,
• move the table top to the center position so that the rails are not in
the radiation beam,
• set SID to 110 cm (wall stand: 150 cm),
• set the collimator to 47 cm x 47 cm (automatic with default),
• remove all objects from the radiation beam,
• clean the patient table if necessary,
• insert the 21 mm Al added filter in the rails of the collimator.
▶ Release exposures according to the examination list;

wait until the following message appears:
Gain Calibration was successful
▶ Select patient list.

▶ Select "Pixel Calibration" in the calibration template and repeat
the steps described above.
▶ If you have a system with a tomography unit, repeat calibration
with the item "Tomo Gain Calibration".
If the exposures are followed by the message
Gain Calibration was not successful or Pixel Calibration was not
successful
check whether

7.1 The system
• the grid has been removed,

• the table top rails are outside the radiation field.
▶ Repeat calibration.
If you still have no success please contact Customer Service.
If the images contain interfering pixels or lines, you should per-
form Pixel Calibration after Gain Calibration. The sequence
of steps is the same.
Proceed accordingly for calibration of the detector of the wall
Bucky.
7.1.25 Calibrating laser printer

Calibration is not possible if the print option is installed via EasyVision
RAD; you must then calibrate EasyVision RAD. Philips recommends
calibration
• once a week,
• after a chemical change,
• if you doubt the image quality.
▶ System Select this.
▶ Service Select this. The service tool appears.

▶ Calibrate Select this.
Explanation:
The density must be between <0.2 and 3.0. The lower value depends
on the developer, the film used etc. You can set the higher value on the
laser printer.
The difference between these two values should meet Philips' recom-
mendation to produce optimum image quality.

In this case the following appears:
• status GOOD or
• status OK
If not, the following appears
• status WARNING
Call Customer Service for the printer.

The system 7.1
Calibrating the grey scales

▶ • Select Grey Levels calibration (1).
• Select the printer to be calibrated (2).
• Select the smallest film format (3).
• Produce an uncalibrated image (4).
4.
1. 2. 3.
▶ Create an uncalibrated image for calibration.

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Measure the density at the 16 marked places of the film with a

calibrated densitometer.
4 5 12 13
3 6 11 14
2 7 10 15
1 8 9 16
▶ Enter all 16 values; this can be done in three ways:

• Click on the numerical field and overwrite the numbers or
• click on the slide control and move it, or
• each click on the gray bar beside the slide control changes the
value by one unit in the direction of the cursor.
For your information:

Optical density = value displayed/10,000.

7.1 The system
▶ Accept input data.

The system checks and confirms the data.
Update HCU ▶ Clicking on this validates the values; a restart is not necessary.
Calibration
▶ Print the control image. The validation screen appears:
▶ Measure the density on the control image again at the 16 marked

places with a densitometer.
▶ Enter the values measured in the validation screen.
• Green: These values have been accepted. If all values are green
calibration has been successful.
• Pink: You can accept these values.
• Rot: These values are incorrect. Check
- the date of expiry of the film
- the printer settings of the manufacturer and calibration
- the printer's self-test
- the printer's warm-up phase

- the densitometer's function
- your entries for typing errors
- your measurements.
Repeat calibration if necessary.
If calibration is not successful, an error message appears.
After successful calibration

The system 7.1
▶ Check calibration.
Return ▶ Click on this.

Restart ▶ The data is accepted.
Calibration of the scale

▶ • Select the scale (1).
• Select the printer to be calibrated (2).
• Select the medium film format (3). Calibration applies to all
scales.
4. • Produce an uncalibrated image (4). The image of the scale to
1. 2. 3. be calibrated will then be printed on the selected printer:
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Measure image width (1) and image height (2) in mm at the outer
edges of the frame.
▶ Enter the values.

7.1 The system
▶ Accept input data.
▶ Print the control image.
▶ Measure data and confirm.

If the data is not within the tolerances, repeat calibration: Click
on Return .
Restart ▶ Click on this. The data is accepted.
7.1.26 Printing
7.1.26.1 Activating printing

Editing settings for a page
You can change the printer settings by selecting them from a selection
window in the menu bar. Some of the available settings depend on what
printer is selected (e.g. format, medium).
If more than one page is sent to the printer, you can edit each page
individually. You can move from page to page using "Next" and "Back".

The system 7.1
Configuring the printer for the current job

▶ Click on this
A list of all available printers appears.
▶ Select printer
Please note:
Your choice of printer influences the list of available print media
(size, orientation, type). The menu bar shows only the print me-
dia supported by the selected printer. This means that changing
the printer may change size, orientation and type if the previously
selected printer defined a print medium which the current printer
does not support.
Setting the medium size

▶ Click on this
A list of all available medium sizes appears; it depends on the
selected printer.
▶ Select medium size
Please note:
Your choice of medium size influences the list of available orien-
tations and types. The menu bar shows only the print media
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
supported by the selected printer. This means that changing the

printer may change size, orientation and type if the previously
does not support.
Setting the medium orientation

▶ Click on this
A list of all available medium orientations appears; it depends on
the selected printer.
▶ Select medium orientation
Please note:
Your choice of medium orientation influences the list of available
sizes and types. The control bar shows only the print media sup-
ported by the selected printer. This means that changing the
printer may change size, orientation and type if the previously
does not support.
Setting the medium type

▶ Click on this
A list of all available medium types appears; it depends on the
selected printer.
▶ Select medium type
Set template for one page

▶ Click on this
A list of all the available templates appears; this list depends on

7.1 The system
the selected medium orientation as templates are orientation-

specific.
The following standard templates are available in portrait and
landscape:
• 2 in 1
• 2 in 1 line
• 2 in 1 column
• 4 in 1
▶ Select template
7.1.26.2 Editing images and viewports

Placing an image in a viewport
All images of a patient appear in the set of saved images. You can place
an image in the viewport by “dragging and dropping”:
▶ Select image from the set of saved images by clicking on it
▶ Click on the selected viewport
If the viewport is empty, the image is placed there.
If there is already an image in the viewport, it is replaced by the
new one.
If the old image was changed, this is applied to the new image.
Removing an image from the viewport

▶ Select image from the viewport by clicking on it
▶ The selected image is removed from the viewport.
Printing the image

▷ If the preview is OK,
▶ send it to the printer.
Now you can
▶ compose a new page with the images on hand
or
▶ exit the print menu.
7.1.26.3 The tools for free composing

The printer bar provides you with other print options.
Clicking on one of these buttons will open a submenu from which you
can select the function you want. Clicking the button again closes the
submenu.

The system 7.1
Changing the image orientation

▶ Open “Image orientation” submenu.
You can
▶ rotate the image 90° to the left/right
or
undo rotation and flipping
Scaling the image

▶ Open “Scale image” submenu.
Apply same ▶ Use the same scale for all images on the film
scale
Link images ▶ Applies changes on one image to all images
▶ You can
• reduce/magnify the image by 1%
• reduce/magnify the image by 5%

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
• change the image so that it fits the viewport exactly
• display the image in original size
• set a percentage.
Zooming on an image field

Zooming on an image field means moving the image as if under a mag-
nifying glass. This function is usually used on images that are larger than
the viewport.
▶ Open “Zoom image” submenu.
▶ You can
• center (button in the middle) the visible part of the image or

move it 1% of the image size toward the
• top left
• top
• top right

7.1 The system
• left,
• right
• bottom left
• bottom
• bottom right.
The default visible part of the image is top left.
▶ Click on the image you wish to move.
▶ Move image by clicking on one of the 9 direction buttons, until
it is in the position you want.
7.1.26.4 Using the template editor

Changing an existing template
Print settings ▶ Call up composer function
Templates ▶ Call up list of templates
▶ Select template to be changed

Edit ▶ Click on this
• Unless the selected template is a read template, continue with
the step "Save changes" (see below).
• If the selected template is a read template (you can tell this by
"*"), you cannot change it. Proceed as follows:
Duplicate ▶ Duplicate template
▶ Select duplicate
Edit ▶ Open the template editor
The selected template appears (example).
▶ Change template
Close ▶ Save changes
If you click on "Close" without saving the template, the template
will be deleted once you close the template editor.

The system 7.1
Creating a new template

Print settings ▶ Call up composer function
Templates ▶ Call up list of templates
Add ▶ Add a new template

A new standard "1 in 1" template is created and added to the list
of templates. You can edit this new template as described above.
Changing a template in the template editor

Please note:
• Every template consists of the following elements:
˗ One or more viewports
˗ One or more text boxes for patient information
• Annotations are not part of a template.
• Templates are orientation-specific. This means that different tem-
plates apply for portrait and landscape media.
• A portrait template can never be placed on a medium for landscape
and vice versa.
• In the template editor, the template has a layout orientation; it can
be horizontal or vertical and is used for automatic layout when view-
ports are added or removed.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
• All dimensions and positions of a template are relative values and

relate to the format of the print medium selected later – given in
1/1000.
Changing the layout orientation of a template

The selected layout orientation appears on the top right in the template
editor. You can only choose between "horizontal" and "vertical".
Page orientation ▶ Change orientation
Changing template settings

Settings ▶ Open the "Settings" window
A list of current settings appears.
Change ▶ Change the template orientation
The selected template orientation appears on the top right in the
template editor. You can only choose between "horizontal" and
"vertical".
▶ Change template margins
The margin values define the area around the template, which are
not valid for the viewports. It often makes sense to leave a header
or footer free for text information. The values to be entered are
relative coordinates – given in 1/1000 of the print medium for-
mat.
▶ You define the template-edge distances by entering values for
• top margin
• left margin
• right margin and
• bottom margin.

7.1 The system
▶ You define the vertical and horizontal spaces between two view-
ports by entering values for the
• horizontal gap and the
• vertical gap.
Accept ▶ Confirm changes
or
Cancel ▶ Undo changes and return to the previous values.
Viewports
A template is structured in lines and columns. Depending on the layout,
there are various options for adding a viewport to a template:
The first step is the same in all options:
Page orientation ▶ If necessary, select the current layout orientation; "horizontal" or
"vertical"
Adding a column viewport

▶ Select page by clicking on any spot on the page that is not also
an element of another page (viewport or text frame).
▶ Add viewport
A new viewport is added at the top left of the template. The ex-
isting viewports are reduced so that all columns are the same
width.
Adding a line viewport

▶ Select page by clicking on any spot on the page that is not also
an element of another page (viewport or text frame).
▶ Add viewport
A new viewport is added at the top left of the template. The ex-
isting viewports are reduced so that all lines are the same width.
Adding a viewport to a column

▶ Select the column to which the viewport is to be added by clicking
on any viewport in this column.
▶ Add viewport
A new viewport is added to the top of the column; the column
width stays the same. The existing viewports in the selected col-
umn are reduced so that all viewports in this column are the same
height.

The system 7.1
Adding a viewport to a line

▶ Select the line to which the viewport is to be added by clicking
on any viewport in this line.
▶ Add viewport
A new viewport is added to the line on the left of the column; the
column height stays the same. The existing viewports in the se-
lected column are reduced so that all viewports in this line are the
same width.
Manually magnifying or reducing a viewport

Please note: The template editor is programmed to make optimal use
of the space on the print medium. This means, for example, that re-
ducing the viewport height automatically increases the height of the
viewports below it in that column.
The first step is the same in all options:
Page orientation ▶ If necessary, select the current layout orientation; "horizontal" or
"vertical".
Changing the height of a viewport

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
This means keeping the top border where it is and moving the lower
border. The viewport below it changes to the same extent as a result of
the top border moving. It is only possible to change the height of indi-
vidual viewports within the columns.
▶ Select the viewport whose height you want to change.
▶ Increase/decrease height.
The bottom border moves down/up.
Please note:
You cannot move the bottom border of the last viewport in a
column downward; you can only increase its height by making
the viewport above it smaller.
Changing the height of a line of viewports

This means changing the height of all viewports within a line at the same
time.
▶ Select the line whose height you want to change
▶ Increase/decrease height.
The bottom border of all viewports in the selected line moves
down/up.
Please note:
You cannot move the bottom border of the last line downward;
you can only increase its height by making the line above it small-
er.
Changing the width of a viewport

This means keeping the left border where it is and moving the right
border. The viewport to the right of it changes to the same extent as a

7.1 The system
result of the left border moving. It is only possible to change the width
of individual viewports within the lines.
▶ Select the viewport whose width you want to increase/decrease
▶ Increase/decrease width.
The right border of the viewport moves to the right/left.
Please note:
The right border of the last viewport in a line cannot be moved
to the right; you can only increase its width by reducing the width
of the viewport to its left.
Changing the width of a column of viewports

This means changing the width of all viewports within a column at the
same time.
▶ Select the column whose width you want to change
▶ Increase/decrease width
The right border of all viewports in the selected column moves
to the right/ left.
Please note:
The right border of the last viewport in a column cannot be
moved to the right; you can only increase its width by reducing
the width of the viewport to its left.
Changing the reference number and calipers position of a viewport

All viewports in a template have a reference number which appears in
the preview. It defines the print sequence. All standard templates have
four calipers (one per side), which you can delete separately.

The system 7.1
▶ Select the viewport to be changed

▶ Click on this
The following appears:
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Select desired viewport number

The selected viewport swaps this number with the viewport which
had this number before
and/or
▶ activate/deactivate calipers you want
and/or
▶ select image alignment
By putting the dot in the right place you can align the image as
follows:
• aligned right/left
• on the top/bottom border
• in one of the four corners
• centered.
Close ▶ Close list
Deleting a viewport
(not possible with 1-to-1 templates)
▶ Select viewport
▶ Delete viewport
The viewport is deleted from the line/column. If it is the only one
in the line/column, then the line/column is also deleted.

7.1 The system
Text box
Text boxes are text fields which are automatically filled in from a report
or a data set. They can be a page element or a viewport element.
Adding a text box to a template
▶ Click on the page or viewport to which the text box is to be added
▶ Add text box.
▶ Define a text box with a rectangle (see above "Draw a rectangle").

Then the text box editor appears (see below "Adding a text box").
Accept ▶ Confirm new text box
or
Cancel ▶ Undo and return to the previous setting.
Deleting a text box from a template

▶ Select text box
▶ Delete text box
Adding a text box

▶ Select text box
▶ Edit text box
The text box editor appears. The numerical values are the ones
in the top left corner of the text box – relative to the elements to
which they are added. This means that the coordinates of a text
box, which belongs to a viewport and lies outside it, are either
negative or larger than 1000.
You can change
• the position of the text box ("x-Pos", "y-Pos")
• the size of the text box ("width", "height")
• the position of the text ("horizontal", "vertical")
• the text ("select text block")
Accept ▶ Confirm changes
or
Cancel ▶ Undo changes and return to the previous setting.
7.1.26.5 Extras
These functions are for changing templates and for displaying areas of
interest.

The system 7.1
Extras ▶ Open “Extras” submenu

You can
• change the current template
▶ Open the template editor
The current template appears.
▶ Change template
• You cannot save the changed template.
• When you close the template editor, the changed template is
taken by the composer and applied to the current page.
• If you select another template from the list of available tem-
plates in the composer, the changed template is temporarily
saved in the template selection window. As long as no print
job is sent with any template other than the temporary tem-
plate, it remains available in the template selection window –
even for more than one page.
• If you close the composer with “End” or print the current
page, the changed template is deleted.
• If the temporary template applies for more than one page, it
is retained. You can print pages one after another with this
template. Once the last page is printed the temporary template
is deleted.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Showing a region of interest.

This means that you select a rectangular area of the image which
has the same aspect ratio as the viewport. The image is then scaled
and modified so that the selected region fills the viewport exactly.
Maximum magnification is 500%.
▶ Click on this
▶ Draw a rectangle
The image is automatically modified.
7.1.27 Stitching
7.1.27.1 What is stitching?

The system supports the automatic and manual joining of several images
to produce one large image, e.g. for for long leg or full spine examina-
tions.
For further information refer to the Application Guide "Automatic
Stitching DigitalDiagnost".
7.1.27.2 The tools

The following tools are available for stitching:

7.1 The system
Button/dis- Meaning
play
Stitching
methods:
Stitch images automatically.
Mark partial images with orientation points.
Stitch images semiautomatically if automatic stitching fails.
Split the image into partial images.
Turn the image 90° to the left.
Flip the image vertically.
Turn the image 90° to the right.
Block horizontal movement.
Move image up.
Block vertical movement.
Move image to left.
Move image down.
Move image to right.
View:
Switch between the cut edges (only with 3 images).
Display stitched image.
Display a cut edge.

The system 7.1
Button/dis- Meaning
play
Switch between the cut edges (only with 3 images).
Show image in original size.
Show image in "pixel to pixel" size
Mark overlap.
Switch on/off transparence function
7.1.27.3 Accessories
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The patient carriage

• Only accessories approved by Philips may be used with the patient
carriage.
• When transporting the patient carriage only use the transport grip.
• When transporting the patient carriage make sure that the footplate
is folded up and locked in place.
• Only use the patient carriage on a level floor.
• Lock the brakes before positioning the patient.
• Make sure that the patient carriage cannot tip over when the patient
gets on or off.

7.1 The system
1
2
3 4
No. Meaning
1 Stretch grip
2 Ruler (detachable)
3 Transport grip
4 Patient grip
5 Hook for holding the folded up footplate
6 Footplate
Normal use
The patient carriage is used to position and support the patient with
multiple exposures.
Prohibited use
• Patients must not be transported with the patient carriage. Risk of
tipping over!
• If you use belts, the patient must not be "strapped down" to the
patient carriage.
Fit stretch grip
1. 2.

The system 7.1
Remove stretch grip
1. 2.
Adjust height of stretch grip
1. 2. 3.
Fold up footplate
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Fold up the footplate until the hook clicks into place.
Fold down footplate

▶ Unlock the hook and fold down the footplate.
Change ruler
▶ Release knurled screw.
▶ Replace ruler.
▶ Tighten knurled screw.
Special collimators for 2 or 3 exposures

(Only for manual stitching)

7.1 The system
Further accessories
• Grip for patient
• Belts for fixing restive patients; belts are not designed for "strapping
down" patients.
• Pads for fixing patient (e.g. for spine exposures); pads are not de-
signed for "clamping down" patients.
• Head support for fixing patient; head clamps are not designed for
"clamping down" patients.
Risk of injury
The compressor must not be used with the patient carriage.
CAUTION
7.1.27.4 Stitching at the wall stand

Preparation
Please note:
• Only use the patient carriage on a level floor.
• Do not move the patient carriage with a patient. Risk of tipping over!
• Lock the brakes before positioning the patient.
• Make sure that the patient carriage cannot tip over when the patient
gets on or off.
▶ Select exposure.
▶ Position patient carriage in front of the wall stand.
▶ Fix the castors to the floor plates.
▶ Lock the castors.

▶ If necessary, remove measuring chamber for the dose area prod-
uct.
▶ Position patient; he must not move during exposure.
▶ Adjust ruler so that it is positioned in the radiation field next to
the area of interest.

The system 7.1
Manual stitching
▶ Adjust SID:
• Spine: 2.00 m
• Legs: 3.00 m
▶ Insert collimators in collimator rails.
Check that the right collimator is inserted.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Adjust opening 1 so that it is in the middle of the light field

(reticule).
▶ Adjust the tube assembly so that the light field completely covers
the region of interest; collimate if necessary.
▶ Select patient data at workstation.
▶ Move collimator to pos. 2.
▶ Adjust detector with light field.
▶ Confirm the image with Next.
▶ Open collimator with Memory .

For 3 exposures
▶ Open collimator with Memory .

7.1 The system
After the final exposure

▶ Patient can get off the patient carriage.
▶ Remove collimators.
▶ : Select this and, if necessary, adjust collimators and/
Toggle Tools
or markings/labels; confirm images or export to EasyVision.
Automatic stitching
▶ Adjust SID:
• Spine: 1.80 m
• Legs: 2.60 m
▶ Adjust the tube assembly so that the light field completely covers
the region of interest; collimate if necessary.
Test ▶ Simulate test run without radiation, if necessary. Depending on
the collimation, two or three exposures are automatically made.
7.1.27.5 Stitching on the patient table

▶ Select auxiliary table.
▶ Select exposure (leg, spine).
▶ Insert grid (f0=1.40 or 1.80, depending on the SID).
▶ Position patient.
▶ Set SID.
Note that the SID is smaller than for stitching at the wall stand.
Set the maximum possible SID.
▶ Set region of interest.
▶ Position the ruler.
• Position the ruler next to the patient parallel to the radiation
field.
• The ruler must be entirely visible with a collimated radiation
field; otherwise the algorithm could fail after collimation.
• Stick down the ruler so that it does not slip (e.g. due to patient
movement).
▶ If necessary, fit the grips so that the patient's arms are not in the
path of radiation.
▶ Collimate, if necessary.
Test ▶ Simulate test run without radiation, if necessary.

The system 7.1
7.1.27.6 Stitching images semi-automatically

The following steps show how to perform the semi-automatic stitching
of two images. Proceed accordingly with three images.
▶ Position the crossed hairlines on the top image at a point on the
ruler that is visible on both images (1).
▶ Show overlapping areas.
▶ Position the crossed hairlines on the bottom image at the same

point on the ruler as in the top image (2).
1 2
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Select function.
⇨ The software will generate a new image on which the two original
images are overlaid at the exact point where you positioned the

7.1 The system
crossed hairlines.
7.1.27.7 Stitching images automatically (autostitching)

Prepare the system
▶ Select patient.
▶ Start examination.
▶ Select the stitching view; the system collimates completely. If you
do not select a stitching view, the radiation field is limited to 43
cm x 43 cm.
⇨ The system is now ready for autostitching.
Always check stitched images

Autostitching can lead to incorrect positive results in overlapping areas.
Philips therefore recommends that:
Before you confirm a stitched image,
WARNING
▪ check it in the stitching processing screen,
▪
correct it if necessary, e.g. with and .
Exposures at the wall stand

▶ The detector must be vertical.

▶ Insert or remove the grid – depending on the examination.
▶ Position and secure the patient carriage (chapter 7.1.27.4).
▶ Turn the tube assembly of the ceiling suspension unit to 90° and
set the programmed SID for stitching.
▶ Position the patient; use grips and belts if necessary.

The system 7.1
▶ Collimate to the region of interest.

▶ Move the ruler to the radiation field so that is visible next to the
region of interest.
Please note:
• The exposures are made from the head end in the direction of the
feet.
• Spine exposures cover a radiation field of 80 cm (by default) and
consist of 2 individual images.
• Leg exposures cover a radiation field of 120 cm (by default) and
consist of 2 or 3 individual images. If you change this default setting,
more or fewer individual exposures will be made.
Exposures on the table

▶ If necessary set the detector and the tube assembly to 0°.
▶ Insert or remove the grid – depending on the examination.
▶ Put the ruler on the table (possibly under the mattress).
Remember that if you use the mattress the image will be en-
larged. You will have to calibrate again afterwards.
▶ Position the patient so that his head is to the left of the tube
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
assembly.
▶ Adjust SID. The tube assembly must be locked into place in the
horizontal position.
▶ Move the table top so that the region of interest is in the radiation
field.
Ensure that there is no danger of it colliding with the wall
stand VM.
▶ Collimate to the region of interest.
• The exposures are made from left to right. If the patient has his head
to the right of the tube assembly, you will have to flip the image on
the horizontal axis.
Test run
In a test run you can run through the examination without radiation:
Test ▶ Press this.
After the test run the system resumes its start position.
▶ If necessary, adapt the exposure parameters.

7.1 The system
Exposure
▶ Release exposure and hold down the switch until the end of
the exposure (acoustic signal).
During this time the patient must not move.
The exposure time is
- 7 s for spine exposures (2 exposures),
- 12 s for leg exposures (3 exposures).
During the exposure the images appear on the screen. If you are
not happy with an image or if the patient moves during the ex-
posure, you can interrupt the exposure: Let go of the switch.
▶ Confirm the images after the last exposure.

If all images for a view have been read out, the system stitches
them automatically. This takes 40 s to 80 s. The view is closed
for this. During which time you can make further exposures. After
automatic stitching, this lights up: Stitching.
▶ : Click on this.
Stitching
The resulting image appears.
Example
You can process this image like you would an individual image.
If automatic stitching fails, a message appears. You will then have to

stitch the images manually (chapter 7.1.27.6).
7.1.27.8 Stitching images manually

The following steps show how to perform the manual stitching of two
images. Proceed accordingly with three images.

The system 7.1
▶ Click on this.
▶ Using the mouse, move the images together in the appropriate
way. For the precision work use and
When the images are correct in one direction, you can lock this
direction with .
Confirm ▶ Confirm the stitched image.
7.1.27.9 Calibration and measurements

The following tools are available for calibration and measurements:
Button Meaning
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Calibration:
Activate calibration.
A line with dimensions appears.
Position the line and enter the values displayed on the right.
Press Enter.
Only use calibration if you know the proportions in
the image, e.g. using a lead ruler. Otherwise you will
produce false measurements. After calibration, all
ruler or stretch sizes are related to the scale defined
here, not to the absolute size of the image on the
image plate.
Switch off calibration.
Measurements:
Generate ruler.
Generate stretch.
Generate angle.
Mark for vertical alignment
Mark for vertical point alignment

7.1 The system
Button Meaning
Mark femoral height distance.
Cobbs angle I (option)
Cobbs angle II (option)
Insert text.
Delete all selected measurement and text elements.
Calibration
The images are calibrated to pixel size. To improve the accuracy of the
measurements, you can calibrate an image again either using a ruler or
another suitable object that you have placed in the exposure area.
To calibrate using the ruler, proceed as follows:
▶ Select calibration.
▶ Click on the ruler at two points.

The distance between these two points is shown.
▶ Enter this value (cm).
The image is then calibrated again, appears blue.
Reject the new calibration with .
You can show or hide the line between the two points with .
Measurements
You can find out which measurements you can perform on an image in
the table above. To enter the measuring points more accurately you can
display the image in its original size ( ) or in the "pixel to pixel"
size ( ).

The system 7.1
▶ Select the function you require and enter the measuring points
in the image with the mouse.
▶ Enter text.
▶ Delete active measurement and text.
You can change the size, font and style of the measuring elements with
the right mouse button.
7.1.28 Digital cassette exposures
7.1.28.1 Types of exposures

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
You can make digital cassette exposures both in the examination room
with the system (with dose information) as well as in another examina-
tion room or with mobile equipment etc. (without dose information).
7.1.28.2 Exposures in the examination room with the system

▶ Select patient.
▶ Select required examination and view.
▶ If necessary, make other exposures.
▶ Make sure that the following parameters have been selected cor-
rectly in the examination list:
• Patient,
• Examination,
• View.
▶ Insert cassette in plate reader.

7.1 The system
Confirm ▶ Check data and confirm.
If the data are not correct:

▶ Select the required data from the list and confirm
or
Cancel ▶ Eject cassette and restart examination.
7.1.28.3 Exposures in another examination room

▶ Take exposed cassette to console.
▶ Select patient.
▶ Select required examination and view.
▶ Make sure that the following parameters have been selected cor-
rectly in the examination list:
• Patient,
• Examination,
• View.
▶ Insert cassette in plate reader.

The system 7.1
As this exposure was not made in the system room, the exposure
parameters are not available. A message to this effect appears.
Confirm ▶ Confirm message.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
If the message is not correct:

▶ Select the required data from the list and confirm
or
Cancel ▶ Eject cassette and restart examination.
7.1.29 Clinical quality control
7.1.29.1 What is clinical quality control?

The system registers all exposures you make, along with the associated
data. For statistical surveys you can filter these data for selective usage.
The function "Clinical Quality Control" is used for this purpose (it is
only available with a corresponding license).
7.1.29.2 Configuring function

System ▶ Click on this.
Service ▶ Click on this.
Clinical QC ▶ Click on this.

7.1 The system
This screen is the starting screen for all other configurations described
below.
Button/ Meaning
Field
Time range Time range of the exposures displayed in the statistics.
Image Statis- Display of statistics of all exposures made in the time period.
tics
Image data ta- Display of all exposures made in the time period.
ble Example:
Rejected Display of repeated exposures only.

Confirmed Display of confirmed exposures only.
All Display of all exposures.
Percentage Percentage of repeated or confirmed exposures.
Images count Absolute number of repeated or confirmed exposures.
Top 20 topic Select topics for the statistical overview which are to be used
as a basis for sorting the statistics (e.g. organ, reasons etc.).

The system 7.1
Button/ Meaning
Field
Add Add more topics to Top 20 topic elements. This screen is con-
figurable.
Example:
Delete Delete topics from Top 20 topic elements.

Export Save data temporarily (e.g. in the transfer directory) for further
export (transfer, CD, USB, etc.).
Example:
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Exit Exit function.
Entering time range

Time range ▶ Click on this
▶ Enter required time range and confirm with OK .

With Cancel you can cancel this process.

7.1 The system
Editing columns of exposure data screen

Image data table ▶ Click on this.
Columns ▶ Click on this.
On the left you will find all available data, and on the right the
data selected.
▶ Activate the data you require and select or deselect with
and .
▶ If necessary, sort the data with and .
OK ▶ Confirm your selection.
With Cancel you can cancel this process.
Exporting images
Export ▶ Click on this.
TRANSFER ▶ Select this.

Save ▶ Click on this.
Service Tools ▶ Click on this. The service tool appears.
Transfer Dir to Storage Medium ▶ Export images to CD or
Transfer Dir to USB Stick ▶ Export images to USB stick.

The BuckyDiagnost CS 2/4 ceiling suspension units 7.2
Exporting statistics
Statistics ▶ Click on this.
▶
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Export Click on this to export as an Excel file.

Save ▶ Click on this.
Service Tools ▶ Click on this. The service tool appears.
Transfer Dir to Storage Medium ▶ Export data to CD or
Transfer Dir to USB Stick ▶ Export data to USB stick.
7.2 The BuckyDiagnost CS 2/4 ceiling suspension

units
7.2.1 Movements
Move tube assembly transversely (blue)

7.2 The BuckyDiagnost CS 2/4 ceiling suspension units
Move tube assembly longitudinally (green)

Rotate the tube assembly round the stand axis (purple, electrical ena-
ble)
Rotate the tube assembly round the stand axis manually (purple)
Raise/lower tube assembly (yellow).


The BuckyDiagnost CS 2/4 ceiling suspension units 7.2
Swivel tube assembly round its transverse axis (black)

The scale shows the angle,
Move tube assembly freely:

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
• longitudinally and
• transversely and
• vertically.
Lock-in postions (if set) in
˗ center position,
˗ parking position,
˗ SID position.
Rotate collimator

7.2 The BuckyDiagnost CS 2/4 ceiling suspension units
7.2.2 Tips to easily position the tube assembly with the control
grip
The button to enable longitudinal, transverse and vertical movement is
positioned at the lowest point on the control grip. So you can lower
even a tube assembly that is parked high above without a ladder.
For longitudinal and transverse movement, you can grip and move the
tube assembly with two hands. You can enable movement with one
finger, without having to take your hand off the control grip.
If you want to move the tube assembly a longer distance, e.g. when
changing from the Bucky table to the wall Bucky, then you should first
rotate the tube assembly and lower it to elbow height. Then you can
move it conveniently with one hand.

The manual collimator 7.3
7.3 The manual collimator
7.3.1 Selecting added filters

Philips recommends:
You work with the added filter, to reduce radiation exposure, especially
for X-ray exposures performed on children.
- 0 mm Al
- 2 mm Al
- 0.2 mm Cu + 1 mm Al
7.3.2 Measuring the SID

▶ Pull out the tape measure parallel to the radiation beam axis as
far as the cassette.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Read off SID.

Please note: At a SID of less than 97 cm the film size of 43 cm x
43 cm will not be fully exposed. Ratio and f0 of the grid used also
limit the usable SID (chapter 10.4.4).
7.3.3 Collimating
Use the smallest possible collimation in order to avoid unnecessary
radiation exposure and to achieve the best image quality (due to
lower radiation scatter).

The following table shows you the values you must set on the collimator
for a known SID and a known radiation field:

7.4 The automatic collimator

cm 13 18 20 24 25 28 30 35 40 43
100 40'' 13 18 20 24 25 28 30 35.5 40 43

110 43'' 12 16.5 18.5 22 23.5 25.5 27.5 32.5 36.5 39
115 45'' 11 15.5 17.5 21 22 24.5 26.5 31 35 37.5
120 48'' 10.5 15 16.5 20 21 23 25 30 33.5 35.5
150 60'' 8.5 12 13 16 17 18.5 20 23.5 26.5 28.5
180 72'' 7 10 11 13 14 15 16.5 19.5 22 23.5
200 78'' 6.5 9 10 12 13 14 15 18 20 21.5
inch 5'' 7'' 8'' 9.5'' 10'' 11'' 12'' 14'' 16'' 17''
Example
(The relevant figures are highlighted in the table)
SID = 115 cm
Radiation field: 24 cm x 30 cm
Values to be set: 21 and 26.5
20
15
10
5
0
7.4.1 Cassette size sensing

The displays illustrated are examples.
When the radiation beam axis is perpendicular to the image receptor,
the system automatically collimates to the size of the cassette inserted.
A 24 x 30 If you change the SID, the collimation will be adapted automatically.
With the combination of "Automatic beam limitation" and "Dose
calculation and display", the system requires the current SID and
the exposed radiation field. For this reason, with oblique projection
and free cassette, you must transfer the SID to the system by meas-
uring with the tape measure.

The automatic collimator 7.4
When the radiation beam axis is oblique to the Bucky grid, the unit
remains ready for exposure. You must collimate manually. Please use
M SID ?? the tape measure. There are two possibilities:
measure SID man.
Starting point:
- radiation beam axis vertical
- cassette inserted
▶ Swivel tube assembly.
- Collimation is retained (incl. any additional manual collima-
tion).
- System enable is retained.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Starting point:
- radiation beam axis vertical
- no cassette inserted
▶ Swivel tube assembly.
- The system collimates to 18 cm x 18 cm for the stored (last used)
SID.
▶ Insert cassette.
The system releases the exposure.
If the unit does not detect any size, the collimator will close. For
further information: press Test .
7.4.2 Selecting added filters

Philips recommends:
You work with the added filter, to reduce radiation exposure, especially
for X-ray exposures performed on children.
By repeatedly pressing this button you can select the added filters in the
following order:
- 0 mm Al
- 2 mm Al
- 0.2 mm Cu + 1 mm Al

With APR the system sets the programmed added filters automatically.
0 Al
7.4.3 SID display

When the radiation beam axis is vertical (lock-in) and patient table is
selected, the SID is automatically measured and displayed.
SID 115
If the radiation beam axis is horizontal and if vertical Bucky is selected,

two arrows on the display indicate that you must move the tube assembly
horizontally until the next valid lock-in.
After lock-in, the SID appears.

The automatic collimator 7.4
SID 115
If the radiation beam axis is oblique, or when using free cassette, you
have to use the tape measure .
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Pull out the tape measure parallel to the radiation beam axis as
far as the cassette center.
▶ Hold the tape measure for about 1 s and wait for the beep; the
SID is then stored and appears in the display field.
▶ Let go of the tape measure.
For an oblique beam exposure on the Bucky grid with cassette
size sensing, the radiation field is collimated to the inserted cas-
sette and displayed.
With a free cassette, the radiation field is collimated to 18 cm x 18 cm

for the measured SID (no exposure beyond the cassette size occurs, as
M SID ?? 18 cm x 24 cm is usually the smallest cassette size).
measure SID man.

▶ If necessary, collimate to the required radiation field size. The

displayed size of the radiation field is valid for the displayed SID.
7.4.4 Collimating
Use the smallest possible collimation in order to avoid unnecessary
radiation exposure and to achieve the best image quality (due to
lower radiation scatter).
With PBL
▶ Collimate manually.
The light field indicator lights up.
If, when using the free cassette technique or with an oblique
radiation beam axis, you change the SID after manual colli-
mation, you will have to measure it again. The measurement
is displayed.
SID 115 16 x 2 0
Back to manual collimation after changing the cassette

▶ Press button.
In automatic mode:
the last manual collimation is set.

Press again:
the nominal size of the cassette detected is set.
In the case of tomography, manual collimation is retained
even after cassette change if the cassette size stays the same
(size and position).
Please note:
At a SID of less than 97 cm the film size of 43 cm x 43 cm will
not be fully exposed. Ratio and f0 of the grid used also limit the
usable SID (chapter 10.4.4).

The extended collimator 7.5
With manual mode

• you cannot select any APR program on the control grip,
• in tomography operation, the system checks whether all com-
ponents are in the correct start position (tube assembly in the
center position, SID and table height correct, collimator open,
cassette inserted),
• the table unit and vertical Bucky are always ready for exposure
– as with a free cassette,
• tracking is not active.
7.5 The extended collimator
7.5.1 Select auxiliary

You will also find the auxiliary buttons on the generator control desk.
The LED of the button pressed is lit.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
AUX 1: Bucky in the table and tube assembly
AUX 2: Tomographic unit
AUX 3: Tube assembly and vertical Bucky
AUX 4: Tube assembly and free cassette

Mode display always "M".
Auxiliaries 5 … 8
If you wish to use more than four auxiliaries or work with the Movable
Cassette Stand (MCS):
You can set the combination of the tube assembly with four auxiliaries
on the control grip. Free cassette is not possible with automatic exposure
control.
A combination with MCS, including automatic exposure control, is
possible. For this you have to switch over to a separate auxiliary (5 ... 8)
on the generator. The collimator can still be operated.
You can recognize the possible combination with one of the auxiliaries
5 ... 8 on the control grip as follows:
• The LEDs for AUXs 5 ... 8 do not light up
• Symbol "Tube assembly selected" is lit
• Mode display: "M".

• APR cannot be selected

• Filter can be set
• SID can be measured
• Display for the radiation field: "???"
If you have selected one of the auxiliaries 1 ... 4 on the generator, you
can switch between these on the control grip. Auxiliaries 5 ... 8 can only
be selected on the generator control desk.
7.5.2 Select APR program

For each auxiliary there are four APR programs available, which Cus-
tomer Service can set according to your requirements. You can call up
the APR programs one after the other by pressing repeatedly.
"=" indicates that the APR program applies to an exposure with grid.
You can select further APR programs on the generator control desk.
These appear on the display of the control grip too.
The system is ready for exposure when

• all components are in the correct position,
• a cassette is inserted in the selected Bucky unit only,
• no Bucky unit contains a cassette in the case of free cassette,
• symbol "Tube assembly selected" is lit.
If the system is not ready for exposure, with Test you can call up a
message which shows why the system is not ready for exposure or what
should be done.
kidney ap =
You will find a list of all the possible messages in the appendix.

7.6.1 Operation of all configurations
7.6.1.1 Switching the generator on/off

Power ON
The generator performs a self-test:

• All the lamps and display segments light up briefly.
• There is an audible signal.

During the test you should check the following:

• Do all the lamps and display segments light up?
• Is there an audible signal?
If there is a fault please call Customer Service. If an error message ap-

pears, you will find help in the appendix (chapter 11.4).
After the self-test the generator assumes the state as it was before the
equipment was last switched off.
Before switching off the generator:
Wait for 1 min after an exposure or after pressing the preparation
button so that the rotating anode can decelerate.
Only in an emergency should you switch it off immediately.
Switching OFF
The generator and all auxiliaries connected will be switched off.
7.6.1.2 Setting display brightness

Press the buttons in the order indicated in the description below and
keep them pressed for as long as you wish to change the brightness.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
To set the display

• of the exposure data field,
• of the APR display not selected and
• possibly of the fluoroscopy display:
mAs mA With "-" brightness is reduced and with "+" it increases.

Reset and or
To set the display

• of the APR program selected (highlighted):
kV With "-" brightness is reduced and with "+" it increases.

Reset and
7.6.2 Operation of the basic configuration
7.6.2.1 Exposure techniques

The following exposure techniques are available:
• kV-mAs technique
• kV-mA-s technique
The table below shows how to switch between the individual techni-
ques:

Initial state Switch over to
7.6.2.2 Making X-ray exposures

▶ Select auxiliary.
The corresponding LED lights up.
▶ Select focal spot.
The medium focal spot is only available with Variofocus (op-
tional).
▶ Enter exposure data.
Example:
▶ If necessary, adapt exposure data to the patient's build. Depend-

ing on programming by Customer Service kV and mAs are
adapted in dose-equivalent increments for each auxiliary.
▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate!
▶ Prepare tube assembly (stage 1).
The symbol "Ready for exposure" goes out briefly.
▶ Release exposure (stage 2).

Hold down button until you hear the audible signal. If you release
before the signal sounds you abort the exposure. Do not press the

button more than three times a minute; this increases the life of
the X-ray tube.
You can press the button straight through to the second stage.
After the preparation time the exposure is released.
The radiation symbol is lit;
preparation/exposure or fluoroscopy can also be indicated visu-
ally (optional).
After exposure
• there is an audible signal
• the radiation symbol goes out,
• the exposure data remain intact.
7.6.3 Operation with AEC, without APR

• kV technique
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
ques:
kV kV-mAs kV-mA-s
kV
mA-s mA-s
AEC AEC AEC
*
kV-mAs
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s
AEC AEC AEC AEC
kV-mA-s
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s
AEC AEC AEC AEC
* Display exposure parameters: press button again.

7.6.3.2 Making X-ray exposures

▶ Select focal spot.

The medium focal spot is only available with Variofocus (op-
tional).
▶ Select measuring field.
• The LEDs of the selected measuring fields light up.
• If you switch off all the measuring fields, the "AEC" button
goes out.
▶ Enter exposure data.
Example:

ing on programming by Customer Service kV, mAs and density
are adapted for each auxiliary.
• kV and mAs in dose-equivalent increments
• density in increments of 6%, 12% or 25%.
▶ Position patient
▶ Collimate!

the X-ray tube.

ally (optional).
After exposure

• the exposure data remain intact

• post-exposure display appears for 25 s.
To call up the post-exposure display again: press .
7.6.4 Operation with APR, without AEC

• kV-mAs-s technique
ques. During installation the kV-mAs technique and the kV-mAs-s
technique can be alternatively programmed.
kV-mAs or kV-mA-s
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
kV-mAs-s*
kV-mAs or
kV-mAs-s*
mA-s mA-s mA-s
AEC AEC
kV-mA-s
mA-s mA-s mA-s
AEC AEC
* Depending on programming by Customer Service

7.6.5 APR records
7.6.5.1 Lists and groups

During installation the generator is equipped with APR records from a
library.
• You can select a program from a list of APR programs
or
• You can select a program from a group of APR programs.

Groups are APR programs collected according to regions of the body,

which then appear on the display under the generic term, the name
of the group.
In addition you can change the exposure data of the program selected.
7.6.5.2 Selecting a program from a group of programs (if saved)

Example:
SKULL SPINE Skull ap/pa Skull lat
CHEST ABDOMEN Skull lat/axial Skull axial
U.EXTREMITIES PELVIS/HIP Sella lat Sinuses
L.EXTREMITIES Temporal bones Menu
The left-hand illustration shows the regions of the body.

If, as highlighted, you select "Skull", the APR programs are displayed,
as shown in the right-hand illustration.
• The corresponding LED lights up.
• The last APR setting selected appears.
Menu ▶ Press this

The groups assigned to that auxiliary appear.
▶ Select group.
• The names of the APR programs assigned appear.
• If there are more programs than can be shown in the display,
the following symbol lights up . With this button you can
scroll through the pages. After the last page the first page re-
appears.
▶ Select APR program.
The name of the program is highlighted, and the corresponding
exposure data appear.
If you do not select any APR program after selecting a group, the
name of the last program selected is highlighted after pressing the
exposure switch; the appropriate exposure data remain intact.
▶ Collimate!


the X-ray tube.

ally (optional).
After exposure
With Menu you can call up the name of the group again.
7.6.5.3 Selecting a program from a list of APR programs

Customer Service can enter APR programs according to your require-
ments. The local guidelines must be observed. If there are any deviations
herefrom, reasons must be given in writing. Other APR programs can
be filed under the buttons of an assigned module.
Example:
Skull ap/pa Skull lat Abdomen ap Abdomen lat
Skull halfaxial Cervical Spine Hip ap Hip med-lat

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Thorac Spine ap Thorac Spine lat Shoulder ap Sternum lat
Lumbar Spine ap LumbarSpine lat Kidney Gallbladder
• The page with the last APR program called up is displayed and
the name of the program is highlighted.
appears.
▶ Collimate!

the X-ray tube.


ally (optional).
After exposure
7.6.5.4 Overriding exposure data of an APR program

Please observe the chapter "Radiation protection" (chapter 2.6). Rea-
sons for deviations from the local guidelines must be given in writing.
You can override the following exposure data:
Focal spot
The medium focus is only available with Variofocus (optional).
Measuring field
Select measuring field.
• The LEDs of the selected measuring fields light up.
• If you switch off all the fields, the "AEC" button goes out.
Switch AEC back on again: Select measuring field.
Exposure voltage
70 kV With you can change the exposure voltage.
– +
Density correction
Only possible with automatic exposure control.
0 With you can change the density.
– +
mAs value
25 mAs With you can change the mAs value.
– +
Exposure current
25 mA With you can change the exposure current.

– +
Screen-film combination
Only possible with automatic exposure control.
G200ST With change the SFC - max. 5 per auxiliary (chapter 11.5).
– +
Exposure time

50 ms With you can change the exposure time.

– +
Not possible with
• tomography auxiliaries with automatic tomographic time input,
• kV-mAs technique.
If you have changed the data of a program, an asterisk appears after the
name of the program. Please observe the instructions for the monitoring
system (chapter 4.15).
Example:
Rectum*
The overridden data remain intact – even if you change e.g. the
auxiliary – until you select the same program again or a different
one.
7.6.5.5 Saving overridden data

and button for the required APR program should be pressed in
this order and held down for longer than 2 s.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The asterisk disappears and the changed data are saved.

If required, Customer Service can prevent the possibility of saving data
which have been changed.
7.6.6 Operation with AEC and APR

• kV technique
• kV-mA technique
• kV-mAs-s technique
ques:

kV or kV-mAs or kV-mA-s
kV-mA kV-mAs-s*
kV or
kV-mA
mA-s mA-s mA-s
AEC AEC AEC AEC AEC
kV-mAs or
kV-mAs-s*
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s
AEC AEC AEC AEC
kV-mA-s
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s
AEC AEC AEC AEC
* During installation the kV-mAs technique and the kV-mAs-s techni-

que can be alternatively programmed.
7.6.6.2 Lists and groups

During installation the generator is equipped with APR records from a
library.
• You can select a program from a list of APR programs
or
• You can select a program from a group of APR programs.
Groups are APR programs collected according to regions of the body,
which then appear on the display under the generic term, the name
of the group.
In addition you can change the exposure data of the program selected.
7.6.6.3 Selecting a program from a group of programs (if saved)

Example:
The left-hand illustration shows the regions of the body.

If, as highlighted, you select "Skull", the APR programs are displayed,
as shown in the right-hand illustration.

• The last APR setting selected appears.
Menu ▶ Press this

The groups assigned to that auxiliary appear.
▶ Select group.
• The names of the APR programs assigned appear.
appears.
If you do not select any APR program after selecting a group, the
name of the last program selected is highlighted after pressing the
exposure switch; the appropriate exposure data remain intact.
▶ If necessary, adapt exposure data to the patient's build.

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Depending on programming by Customer Service kV, mAs and

density are adapted for each auxiliary:
▶ Collimate!

the X-ray tube.

ally (optional).
After exposure
• in the case of exposures without automatic exposure control
the exposure data remain intact.
• in the case of exposures with automatic exposure control the
post-exposure display remains for 25 s.

With Menu you can call up the name of the group again.
You can repeat the exposure using the same exposure data but
without automatic exposure control:
▶ Switch AEC off.
If, after 25 s the post-exposure display disappears to level 2, you
must first call up the post-exposure display of the last exposure
and then switch AEC off.
▶ Call up post-exposure display of the last exposure.
▶ Position patient if necessary.

▶ Collimate if necessary!
▶ Prepare exposure and release (see above).
7.6.6.4 Selecting a program from a list of APR programs

Customer Service can enter APR programs according to your require-
ments. The local guidelines must be observed. If there are any deviations
herefrom, reasons must be given in writing. Other APR programs can
be filed under the buttons of an assigned module.
Example:
• The page with the last APR program called up is displayed and
the name of the program is highlighted.
appears.
▶ Collimate!


the X-ray tube.
ally (optional).
After exposure
• in the case of exposures without automatic exposure control
the exposure data remain intact.
• in the case of exposures with automatic exposure control the
post-exposure display remains for 25 s.
You can repeat the exposure using the same exposure data but
without automatic exposure control:
▶ Switch AEC off.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The exposure data last used appear.
7.6.6.5 Selecting exposure current for kV-mA technique

With the kV-mA-s technique you have the option of selecting the ex-
posure current for the next exposure. You can also program it as the
default according to your applicational requirements, e.g. to extend the
exposure time for making an exposure of the odontoid process of the
axis.
For the kV-mA technique you set the exposure current
• in the kV-mA-s technique direct or
• indirectly in the kV-mAs-s technique.
Please adhere to the sequence of steps.

a. Setting via the kV-mA-s technique
▶ Switch AEC off.
The generator switches to the kV-mA-s technique; if the gener-
ator is programmed to the kV-mAs-s technique, proceed as
described in b.
▶ Set exposure current.
If, for example, you reduce exposure current, the exposure time
is correspondingly longer with the kV-mA technique.
▶ Switch AEC on.
This defines the last exposure current set for the next expo-
sure; automatic exposure control regulates exposure time accord-
ingly.
If required you can save these data (chapter 7.6.5.5).

If you wish to save the overridden data, you must select the
exposure time before saving so that the mAs product assumes
an anatomical value.
▶ Set exposure time.
b. Setting via the kV-mAs-s technique

▶ Switch AEC off.
The generator switches to the kV-mAs-s technique.
▶ Set anatomical mAs.
Exposure current is set automatically via mAs.1
▶ Set anatomical exposure time.
▶ Switch AEC on.

This defines the last exposure current set for the next expo-
sure; automatic exposure control regulates exposure time accord-
ingly.
1
If you wish to change the exposure current directly:
▶ Switch on mAs.
The generator switches to the kV-mA-s technique.
Proceed as described in a), second step.
7.6.7 Tomography
7.6.7.1 Making tomographic exposures without automatic

exposure control (TDC)
▶ Select tomography.
If units are equipped with a remote selection feature, the gener-
ator switches over automatically to tomography if you select this
mode on the unit.
• The LED lights up.
• kV-mAs- or kV-mAs-s technique is activated.
you can use to scroll through the pages. After the last page,
page 1 reappears.

The name of the program is highlighted.
▶ Prepare auxiliary for tomography.
▶ On the auxiliary select a tomo trajectory which matches the APR
program selected.
Exposure time and tomographic time must agree. If necessary,
match exposure time to tomographic time.
▶ Select mAs or mA – depending on the programming.

• After selecting a tomo trajectory the respective exposure time

will be automatically set on the generator if
- the generator is equipped with "Automatic tomographic
time input" (optional) and
- a suitable tomography unit is connected up.
• The symbol "Ready for exposure" lights up.
▶ Collimate!

the X-ray tube.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

ally (optional).
After exposure
• the radiation symbol goes out.
7.6.7.2 Tomographic exposures with automatic exposure control

(TDC)
Via the option "Automatic tomographic time input" the unit transmits
the specified exposure time to the generator. You cannot override it.
If you have selected tomography, the following table shows how to
switch between the individual techniques:

TDC kV-mAs-s kV-mA-s

TDC
mA-s mA-s mA-s
AEC AEC AEC AEC AEC
kV-mAs-s
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s
AEC AEC AEC AEC
kV-mA-s
mA-s mA-s mA-s mA-s
AEC AEC AEC AEC
7.6.7.3 Making tomographic exposures with automatic exposure

control (TDC)
▶ Select tomography.
If units are equipped with a remote selection feature, the gener-
ator switches over automatically to tomography if you select this
mode on the unit.
• The LED lights up.
• kV-mA-s or kV-mAs-s technique is activated.
appears.
The name of the program is highlighted.
Prepare auxiliary for tomography.
ing on programming by Customer Service kV, mAs and density
are adapted for each auxiliary:

▶ Collimate!



the X-ray tube.
ally (optional).
After exposure
• the radiation symbol goes out.
If there has been an incorrect exposure, see next chapter.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.6.7.4 Selecting initial current for TDC

If there has been an incorrect exposure, you must correct the initial
current. This can also be performed for existing programs if the appli-
cation requires.
You can set the initial current for TDC
• in the kV-mA-s technique direct or
• indirectly in the kV-mAs-s technique.
Please adhere to the sequence of steps.
a. Setting via the kV-mA-s technique

▶ Switch AEC off.
The generator switches to the kV-mA-s technique; if the gener-
ator is programmed to the kV-mAs-s technique, proceed as
described in b.
▶ Set initial current.
▶ Switch AEC on.

This defines the initial current last set for the next exposure.
b. Setting via the kV-mAs-s technique

▶ Switch AEC off.

The generator switches to the kV-mAs-s technique.
▶ Set anatomical mAs.
Initial current is set automatically via mAs.1
▶ Switch AEC on.
This indirectly defines the initial current for the next expo-
sure.
1
If you wish to change the initial current directly:
▶ Switch on mAs.
The generator switches to the kV-mA-s technique.
Proceed as described in a), second step.
7.6.8 The dose display

The dose display is optional and depends on the system. This appears
only if an auxiliary with size sensing has been selected. The computer
totals and stores the area dose products of all the exposures. If you switch
examination rooms with the auxiliary, this total remains intact and is
available when you select the examination room again. The values are
lost if or are pressed.
The LED lights up.
▶ Call up level 3. The total of area dose products [cGycm2] of all

exposures for the current patient in the room selected appears.
▶ Delete dose display per tube.
The dose display is also deleted if
• the PDO (optional) reports: "End of Examination".
• the DigitalDiagnost system reports: "End of Examination". Philips Medical Systems, November 2006

7.7.1 Moving unit
7.7.1.1 General
Risk of trapping fingers!
DANGER
Remove all persons and objects from the range of device movement.
The Bucky unit is equipped with a collision guard. This means that movement
stops when the Bucky unit runs into an obstacle.
7.7.1.2 Raising/lowering Bucky unit

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Electric
Raise slowly
Raise quickly

Lower slowly
Lower quickly
Manual
Raise/lower Bucky unit
7.7.1.3 Tilting Bucky unit
Remove the stretch grip, if necessary, so as not to inhibit tilting.

WARNING

Into the horizontal position
Into the vertical position

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.7.1.4 Moving Bucky unit into the factory-set default position

Please note:
You must always press the button for the 2nd function first.
Bucky unit raises, e.g. for thorax exposures.
2.
Stop movement:
1. • Press button again or
• press this

Bucky unit raises and tilts to -20°, e.g. for skull exposures.
Stop movement:
• Press button again or
• press this
Bucky unit
• move from the vertical position into the horizontal position or
• tilt from -20° to 0°.
The height remains the same.
Stop movement:
• press this
Bucky unit lowers, e.g. for foot exposures.
Stop movement:
• press this
Bucky unit lowers and tilts into the horizontal position, e.g. for expo-
sures of the extremities.

Stop movement:
• press this
Bucky unit
• move from the horizontal position into the vertical position or
• tilt from 0° to -20°.
The height remains the same.
Stop movement:
• press this
7.7.2 Changing a grid
7.7.2.1 Inserting a grid

▶ Press button if the yellow LED is not lit
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Push the grid fully into the slit

• The grid automatically moves into the start position.
• The yellow LED flashes first and then lights up.

7.7.2.2 Removing a grid

▶ Press button
▶ Press lever down

(in the "right-hand" version the lever is on top)
▶ Remove a grid
▶ Insert new grid or
press button again.
If you do not press the button again, the grid carriage moves into
the protected position after approx. 20 s.
7.7.2.3 Parking / removing a grid

You can store two grids behind the flap in the Bucky unit.

▶ Open flap: press briefly
▶ Insert / remove grid

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Close flap
7.7.3 Changing a cassette
7.7.3.1 Inserting a cassette
NOTE Only with non-digital version.
If programmed, you can also insert the cassette off-center with sensing
and tracking.
Risk of trapping fingers between the cassette and cassette tray.
CAUTION

1. 2.
3. 4.
5.
Lead type
The lead type is usually attached directly to the cassette using adhesive
tape, according to requirement. Up to a thickness of 3 mm, there is no
reason not to do this. Use a new strip of adhesive tape each time, as
otherwise the lead type will become detached and fall into the electron-
ics, which may cause serious damage to the Bucky.
7.7.3.2 Cassette size sensing

(optional)
After insertion of the cassette tray the unit detects the size of the inserted
cassette.

7.7.3.3 Removing a cassette
Risk of trapping fingers between the cassette and cassette tray.
CAUTION
1. 2.
3. 4.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.7.4 The stretch grip
7.7.4.1 Installation / Dismantling

Fit on the Bucky unit on the left or right or remove from the Bucky
unit.
Maximum load: max. 30 kg
7.7.4.2 Swiveling the stretch grip
Risk of trapping fingers between the stretch grip and the Bucky unit.
CAUTION

By swiveling the stretch grip you can adjust its height to the patient's
height.

Example: Thorax pa
▶ Select APR program or set exposure parameters or exposure via

workstation.
▶ Clean the chin rest and front panel.
▶ Position patient; to make positioning the patient more comfort-
able, the patient should use the grips. Adjust height of stretch grip
if necessary.
Risk of trapping fingers between the grips and the holder of the lead apron.
CAUTION
▶ Swivel lead apron in front of patient.

▶ Move the Bucky unit to the required height.
▶ Set the source-image distance (SID).
▶ Align X-ray tube assembly to the Bucky unit using the light field
and, if necessary, the laser.

Risk of injury
If the patient is lying on the table:
▪ The table top may sag with heavy patients.
DANGER
▪ Secure the patient from falling off.
▪ You have to keep a patient on the table under constant observation, in par-
ticular if narcotized or restive.
▪ With all movements make sure that the patient is not injured.
▪ Before the patient leaves the table: Move the table top to the front position
so that the patient
– does not put his foot between the grip and detector,
– does not tread on the footswitch.
7.7.6 Collimating
▶ If the cassette is inserted centrally or with centered collima-
tion to the detector:
move the tube assembly vertically until the laser points to the
middle.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ If the cassette is inserted off-center or with off-center collima-

tion to the detector (example: cassette, 35 cm portrait, at the top
edge of the cassette tray):
move the tube assembly vertically until the laser points to the
center top mark.
▶ Collimate
With automatic size sensing you can still change the exposed area
within the beam limitation. With off-center setting without
tracking you must adjust the height of the tube assembly.
If you reduce the exposed area within the beam limitation, this
may no longer be positioned over a measuring field. As the system
does not automatically switch to the next "suitable" measuring
field, you will be prompted to check the measuring field selection.
The measuring fields must lie inside the collimated field. If not: change or switch
off measuring fields.
WARNING

7.8.1 Moving unit

The detector is equipped with a collision guard. This means that move-
ment stops when the detector runs into an obstacle.
Raising/lowering detector
Perform the following movements electrically
T r a c kin g
Raise slowly
Memo r y
T r a c kin g
Raise quickly
Memo r y
T r a c kin g
Lower slowly
Memo r y

T r a c kin g
Lower quickly
Memo r y
Manual
T r a c kin g
Perform the following movements with the detector manually

• raise/lower
• move horizontally
Memo r y
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Tilting detector
Risk of collision
Remove the stretch grip if necessary before tilting.
WARNING
You can only tilt the detector when it is not swiveled round.
T r a c kin g
Into the horizontal direction
Memo r y

T r a c kin g
Into the vertical direction
Memo r y
Moving detector into default position

(option with VM Compact)
Please note: You must always press the button for the 2nd function
first.
Move detector into the vertical position (thorax).
2.
1.
T r a c kin g
Move detector up to -20°.
Memo r y
T r a c kin g
Move detector into the horizontal position; the height remains the same.
Memo r y

T r a c kin g
Move detector down into the vertical position.
Memo r y
T r a c kin g
Move detector down into the horizontal position.
Memo r y
• The detector is not vertical: The detector moves into the vertical
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
T r a c kin g
position. The height remains the same.

• The detector is vertical: The detector moves to -20°. The height re-
mains the same.
Memo r y
Moving stand to side

(not possible with VM Compact)
Risk of collision
Remove all persons and objects from the range of stand movement.
Avoid collisions with the ceiling suspension unit or table.
CAUTION

In conjunction with BuckyDiagnost TH-S:

For X-ray exposures on the table:
Make sure that the detector is on the same side of the position mark as
the table.
Right (example):
For X-ray exposures directly at the detector:

Make sure that the detector is on the other side of the position mark as
the table.
Right (example):
Wrong (example):
Swiveling detector
(not possible with VM Compact)

To swivel, the detector must be vertical.

The grip to swivel the detector is on the rear of the detector.
Press button in grip and swivel detector.
Swiveling detector and tube arm
CAUTION
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

Inserting a grid
Risk of injury
Do not reach into the grid slot.
CAUTION

▶ Press button.
▶ Insert the grid into the slit; it will be drawn in automatically.
Removing a grid
▶ Press button.
▶ Press lever up.

(in the left-hand version the lever is on bottom).
The action of the spring causes the grid to protrude slightly from
the slot so you can grasp it easily.
▶ Remove grid.

Risk of injury
Do not drop the grid; you might damage it and/or injure your feet.
CAUTION
Parking a grid
You can store two grids behind the flap in the detector.
▶ Open flap: press briefly.
▶ Insert grid.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Close flap.


unit.

CAUTION
height.

Example: Thorax pa

workstation.

if necessary.
CAUTION


Risk of injury
DANGER
so that the patient
7.8.5 Collimating
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
T r a c kin g
Preselected orientation of radiation field

(option with VM Compact):
Memo r y
• off-center at the top or

• centered or
• off-center at the bottom
• portrait or
• landscape

▶ Select position of measuring fields (not available with VM Com-

T rackin g
pact).
Memory
▶ Switch on light field indicator.

T rackin g
Memory
▶ Collimate.
T rackin g
Memory
7.9.1 Moving unit
Risk of collision
Remove all persons and objects from the range of stand movement.
Avoid collisions with the ceiling suspension unit or table.
CAUTION
The detector is equipped with a collision guard. This means that move-
ment stops when the detector runs into an obstacle.
Perform the following movements electrically

T rackin g
Move stand to right.
Memory
T rackin g
Raise detector.
Memory
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
T rackin g
Move stand to left.
Memory
T rackin g
Lower detector.
Memory
Aligning the detector and the tube assembly

Please note for correct function:
After restarting or starting the system, move the tube assembly to 0° or
90° and to a longitudinal lock-in position.

You can align the tube assembly and detector for all views, including
the following detector positions:
• "under the table" horizontal (tube assembly at 45° like TH+Tomo)
• "beside the table" horizontal (tube assembly at 45°)
• "behind the table" vertical (tube assembly at 45°)
This function is independent of tracking.

The function is deactivated
• if the detector is vertical beside the table (thorax) to protect the pa-
tient
• if the tilt angle of the detector or tube assembly deviates from 45°.
▶ Press this for longer than 2 seconds.

The detector aligns itself to the tube assembly.
• After it starts to move you can let go of the button.
• The movement stops
- if you press another button,
- if there is a collision.
• The alignment is lost if you move the tube assembly again after
the movement has finished.
Tilting detector
Risk of collision
Remove the stretch grip if necessary before tilting.
WARNING
You can only tilt the detector when it is not swiveled round.
T rackin g
Into the horizontal direction
Memory
T rackin g
Into the vertical direction

Memory

Moving the detector automatically to the defined position (MTP,

move to position)
Please note for correct function:
After restarting or starting the system, move the tube assembly to 0° or
90° and to a longitudinal lock-in position.
Please note: You must always press the button for the 2nd function
first.
Risk of collision
Ensure that there are no obstructions in the range of movement of the detector
and the tube assembly.
CAUTION
T rackin g
• Move the detector to 0° and the tube assembly to 90° (thorax).
• Move the stand into the position for horizontal exposures on the wall
stand.
2. Memory
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
1.
T rackin g
Move the detector into the position for lateral exposures (e.g. skull lat-
eral).
Memory
T rackin g
Move detector into the horizontal position. The height remains the
same.
Memory

T rackin g
• Move detector down into the vertical position.
• Move the stand into the position for horizontal exposures on the wall
stand (e.g. hand pa).
Memory
T rackin g
Move detector into the horizontal position under the table (e.g. abdo-
men ap).
Memory
T rackin g
• The detector is not vertical: The detector moves into the vertical
position. The height remains the same.
• The detector is vertical: The detector moves to -20°. The height re-
mains the same.
Memory
Manual
T rackin g
Perform the following movements with the detector manually

• raise/lower
• move horizontally
Memory

Move stand to side

In conjunction with BuckyDiagnost TH-S:
For X-ray exposures on the table:
Make sure that the detector is on the same side of the position mark as
the table.
Right (example):
For X-ray exposures directly at the detector:

Make sure that the detector is on the other side of the position mark as
the table.
Right (example):
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Wrong (example):

Swiveling detector
To swivel, the detector must be vertical.
The grip to swivel the detector is on the rear of the detector.
Press button in grip and swivel detector.
Swiveling detector and tube arm
CAUTION

Inserting a grid
Risk of injury
Do not reach into the grid slot.
CAUTION

▶ Press button.
▶ Insert the grid into the slit; it will be drawn in automatically.
Removing a grid
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Press button.
▶ Press lever up.

(in the left-hand version the lever is on bottom).
The action of the spring causes the grid to protrude slightly from
the slot so you can grasp it easily.
▶ Remove grid.

Risk of injury
Do not drop the grid; you might damage it and/or injure your feet.
CAUTION
Parking a grid
You can store two grids behind the flap in the detector.
▶ Open flap: press briefly.
▶ Insert grid.
▶ Close flap.


unit.

CAUTION
height.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

Example: Thorax pa

workstation.

if necessary.
CAUTION


Risk of injury
DANGER
so that the patient
7.9.5 Collimating
T rackin g
Preselected orientation of radiation field

(option with VM Compact):
• off-center at the top or
• centered or
• off-center at the bottom
• portrait or
• landscape
Memory

The mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS 7.10
T rackin g
▶ Select position of measuring fields (not available with VM Com-

pact).
Memory
T rackin g
▶ Switch on light field indicator.
Memory
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
T rackin g
▶ Collimate.
Memory
7.10.1 Movements
Move tube assembly transversely (blue)

Tube arm with telescopic extension

Move tube assembly longitudinally (green)

Swivel tube arm (purple)

• electrical enable
• manual
Raise/lower tube assembly (yellow)

LED lights up when the SID set is reached. The vertical movement is
decelerated. Philips Medical Systems, November 2006

The mobile floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS 7.10
Swivel tube assembly round its transverse axis (black)

The scale shows the angle,
Move tube assembly freely:

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
• longitudinally and
• transversely and
• vertically.
Lock-in or braking positions (if set) in
˗ center position,
˗ parking position,
˗ SID position.
Turn collimator;
collimator locks in standard setting.

7.11.1 For your guidance

The following operating instructions apply to the BuckyDiagnost TH2.
If a step is only applicable to the BuckyDiagnost TF, this will be pointed
out explicitly.
7.11.2 Moving the table top
Remove all persons and objects from the range of table top movement
DANGER
(gray). Ensure that the patient is lying still and is not grasping the edges of the
table top. If necessary, use grips, straps etc.
Table top downward movement stops if there is a collision. The oper-

ating point depends on the patient's weight. Upward movement is still
possible. You should move the ceiling suspension unit before the table
top collides with it during upward movement.
Moving the table top horizontally
("floating" table top)
• On BuckyDiagnost TH2 Philips Medical Systems, November 2006
• On BuckyDiagnost TF

Raising the table top

Movement stops at the preferred working height (set during installa-
tion).
Continue movement:
Press the footswitch or handswitch again.
The table has a protection switch to prevent overloading. If you con-

tinuously raise and lower the table top for over 3 minutes, power will
be cut off. Then you will have to wait another 20 minutes.
Lowering the table top
The table top stops at the preferred working height.
Continue movement:
Press the footswitch or handswitch again.
Disable footswitch
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The button is lit.
Enable footswitch again:

Press button again.
7.11.3 Adjusting SID and collimating with Bucky exposures

▶ Close the cassette tray.
▶ Set radiation beam axis vertically.
▶ Raise/lower tube assembly if necessary.

On a manual system
▶ Read off the SID on the scale on the ceiling suspension unit; the
value applies to the preferred table height.
▶ Collimate according to the table on the collimator.
On a system with automatic collimation

• The SID appears in the control grip display
• The system collimates automatically (if Automatic is active).
SID 115
Mode display
This displays the currently active mode:
"A" – automatic collimation (sensing)
"AT" – automatic collimation and tracking
"M" – manual
"MT" – manual and tracking
7.11.4 Cassette size sensing

Do not put your fingers in the gap between the table top and Bucky
DANGER
carriage.
Bucky ACL4
The cassette size is detected during cassette transport.

Manual Bucky
After insertion of the cassette tray the unit registers the size of the in-
serted cassette.
How accurately the unit detects the size depends on whether you cen-
tered the cassette exactly on insertion.
Philips therefore recommends centering the cassette as exactly as
possible on insertion.
You can use cassettes both in cm and inch format. When using both,
the display is correct except in the cases shown below. (The difference
between 24 cm and 10'' or 30 cm and 11'' is very slight. The compro-
mise between accuracy of display and accuracy of insertion permits
comfortable working).
Cassette upright Display in cm Display in inch
30 cm x 24 cm 30 by 25 11 by 10
12'' x 10'' 30 by 25 12 by 9.5
35 cm x 30 cm 35 by 28 14 by 11
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.11.5 Inserting and removing a cassette

Bucky ACL4
Insert cassette...
Slide cassette fully into the cassette carriage, then let go of it.

... and take out again

Remove the exposed cassette or else there will be no system enable for
the next exposure.
If programmed, the cassette carriage will move to the loading position
for approx. 15 s after exposure so that you can conveniently remove the
cassette. Then the cassette carriage moves to the exposure position again.
Lead type
The lead type is usually attached directly to the cassette using adhesive
tape, according to requirement. Up to a thickness of 3 mm, there is no
reason not to do this. Use a new strip of adhesive tape each time, as
otherwise the lead type will become detached and fall into the electron-
ics, which may cause serious damage to the Bucky.
The reset function
The ACL4 always carries out a self-test and stops automatically to pre-
vent damage if an error is detected. This may mean that you are not able
to remove an exposed cassette. In this case you can reactivate the ACL4
with "Reset" and then remove the cassette. If there is a mechanical
blockage, "Reset" has no effect, and you must inform Customer Service.
For "Reset", press both buttons simultaneously.
Manual Bucky

Risk of trapping fingers between cassette and cassette tray!
DANGER
Insert the cassette ...

1. 2.
3. 4.
2.
1.
… and take out again

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
1. 2.
3. 4.
2.
1.

Bucky ACL4 with automatic cassette loading
Never leave any objects on the measuring chamber because they would be ex-
posed on film.
Protect the grid from damage. Even if you can insert a damaged grid, it cannot
be used because bent shutters do not focus properly.
CAUTION

▶ Close the cassette carriage if necessary

▶ 1. Move table top to the rear
2. Open flap
▶ Pull out the grid horizontally without tilting it
▶ Push in the grid horizontally without tilting it until the unlock

lever engages; for exposures without grid, close the flap directly
(next fig.)
▶

The patient table Single Sided Table TH-S 7.12
7.11.7 Setting center position

Do not put your fingers in the gap between the table top and Bucky carriage.
CAUTION
If you want to set the center position with the ACL4, you have to use
Syste m
the center indicator.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Swivel the center indicator out of the parking position.

▶ Pull up the brake lever and move the Bucky.
▶ Park center indicator:
Turn to the side to below the Bucky.
7.12.1 Safety instructions

WARNING
▪ Before the patient leaves the table:
Move the table top to the front position so that the patient
– does not put his foot between the grip and detector

7.12.2 Moving the table top
Remove all persons and objects from the range of table top movement.
WARNING
Moving the table top horizontally (manually)

("floating" table top)
Lowering the table top (motorized)

• The table stops at the preferred working height (75 cm)
continue movement: press pedal again.
• The table stops at 60 cm (protection against collisions with detec-
tor)
Raising the table top (motorized)
• The table stops at the preferred working height (75 cm)
7.12.3 Other functions

Disable footswitch;
The buttons are lit.
Enable footswitch;
Press button again.
Disable footswitches when the patient gets on or off the table.
WARNING

The patient transport table Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M 7.13
7.12.4 In the event of a collision
The button flashes if there is a collision.

▶ Simultaneously press this button and the footswitch which
moves the table top away from the collision.
7.13 The patient transport table Height Adjustable

Trolley TA-M
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
7.13.1 Safety precautions
Risk of injury
▪ Secure the patient from falling off if you wish to transport him on the table.
DANGER
▪ With all movements make sure that the patient is not injured, in particular
when raising and lowering the table top.
▪ Make sure that the patient does not tread on the pedals when getting on or
off the table.
▪ With all movements make sure that you do not run over any cables, pass over
anyone's feet or collide with any obstacles.
▪ Always apply the brakes if the table is to remain stationary. This prevents it
from rolling away when a patient gets on or off.
▪ Only use accessories approved by Philips for this unit.
7.13.2 Applying/releasing brakes

Lock all castors.

All castors freely movable.
Brake front castors "forwards", rear castors freely movable.
7.13.3 Moving unit

Move unit longitudinally
Move unit longitudinally and table top transversely ("floating table

top").
Raise table top.


The patient transport table TRAUMOB X 7.14
Lower table top

patient
When transfering from/to and getting onto/off the table, the TRAUMOB X must
be standing firmly on a level floor on all four castors. The castors must be locked.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
CAUTION
Patients who are unable to walk

• Before transfering the patient, move the TRAUMOB X alongside
the table or bed, leaving no gap between the table tops or table and
bed.
• Lock the castors (chapter 7.14.4).
• When transfering the patient, push the TRAUMOB X against the
table top or bed.
Patients who are able to walk

• Lock the castors before the patient gets on or off the TRAUMOB
X.
• Lower the table top to a comfortable sitting height for the patient.
7.14.2 Inserting table top

Insert the table top into the metal brackets at the head and feet ends
with the smooth surface facing upward.
7.14.3 Moving unit
Do not move the trolley with the patient on it if the red warning sign is visible.
CAUTION

The trolley is equipped with offset castors for better maneuvrability.

Please note that there is an increased risk of the trolley toppling over on
uneven surfaces.
YES
NO
7.14.4 Operating brakes

At this pedal setting the trolley will move freely.
At this setting one of the castors is locked to move "straight ahead".
The castors are locked.
7.14.5 Raising/lowering table top
Make sure that the table top does not drop suddenly when the patient is lying on
it and you disengage the lock. The patient's weight is only partly counterbalanced.
CAUTION

2.
1.
7.15.1 Switching ON/OFF
NOTE The plate reader is designed for continuous operation. It is therefore only neces-
sary to switch it off in the event of prolonged stoppages.
Switching ON
▷
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The PC and the application program on the operator's console

have been started up.
▶ Press main switch to the "I" position.
• The pilot lamp on the control panel of the plate reader lights
up.

• The plate reader begins the start-up procedure, which takes a

short time. Then the load lamp lights up.
• The plate reader is ready when the green load lamp lights
up.
Switching OFF
▷ Processing of the last cassette is complete.
• The unload lamp lights up.

▶ Take out the cassette.
▶ Press main switch to the "0" position.

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
• The plate reader is now properly switched off.
7.15.2 Reading out image plate

The image does not appear on screen until the end of readout.
To read out an image plate you must
• slide the plate cassette into the plate reader,
• have the image plate read out and
• remove the plate cassette again.
Inserting a cassette
Incorrectly inserting the cassette can damage the plate reader. Ensure that the
cassette is not inserted upside down, at an angle or incorrectly aligned. If you used
lead type when making the exposure, remove these from the cassette before in-
serting it.
WARNING
NOTE If you are working without a barcode reader the load lamp only appears in the
"Examination" section.

Ensure that you insert the cassette straight and right along the right feed edge.
WARNING
▷ The patient has been X-rayed. The exposures can be found on

one or more plate cassettes.
▶ Check that the load lamp is lit on the control panel of the plate
reader.
▶ Turn the cassette so that the side to be exposed faces down, and
the barcode window goes in first and faces up.
▶ Slide the cassette into the cassette compartment straight along the
right feed edge (X).
Never insert the cassette like this:

Wrong! Gap between cassette and feed edge

Wrong! Cassette is at an angle

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
• The cassette slots into place. You will feel slight resistance when in-
serting the cassette, which you must overcome.
• The load lamp on the control panel of the plate reader goes out.
Image plate readout begins automatically.
• The status displays flash on the control panel:
The first arrow flashes during readout. The second arrow flashes
when erasure begins until the image plate is reloaded in the cassette.
Removing a cassette
NOTE While the image plate is being read out the cassette is locked in the plate reader;
the status displays flash.

▶ Check that the unload lamp is lit on the control panel.
▶ Pull the cassette in a straight line and slowly out of the cassette
compartment.
• The unload lamp goes out; the load lamp lights up.
• The cassette is ready for use again.

• The exposure which has been read out is added to the patient’s
exposures. Unless you have selected another patient or another
exposure for processing, the exposure which has been read out
appears on the monitor.
NOTE If you work with the multiple-console system, the exposure which has been read
out is stored and displayed on the console on which you have assigned the plate
cassette to a view.

7.15.3 Performing secondary erasure

Normally, the image plates are automatically erased after readout. If,
however, an image plate has not been used in the past 8 hours, so-called
secondary erasure is necessary. Here, the cassette is merely erased, and
not read out.
With time, the image plates absorb natural radiation, with the result
that images with low exposure levels have a higher noise component. In
applications with a low radiation dose you should therefore perform
secondary erasure on the image plate after prolonged storage.
Proceed as follows:
▶ Press the erase button.
• The field beside it displays the "secondary erasure" mode for
the next cassette to be inserted.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
During erasure, the status display for cassette processing flashes.
On the monitor, a message concerning the plate reader mode
appears above the progress indicator. After erasure, the plate
reader automatically switches back into normal read mode, mean-
ing the erasure procedure only ever applies to one cassette.
When the unload lamp lights up, erasure is complete. You can
remove the cassette and use it for a new exposure.
7.15.4 Performing primary erasure

Normally, the image plates are automatically erased after readout. After
incorrect exposure, however, special, primary erasure is necessary. Here,
the cassette is merely erased, and not read out.
NOTE If the plate reader detects an incorrectly exposed image plate, an error message
to that effect appears. You may not use incorrectly exposed image plates for
around 16 hours after primary erasure.
Proceed as follows:
▶ Press the erase button twice.

• The field beside it displays the "primary erasure" mode for the
next cassette to be inserted.
After erasure, the plate reader automatically switches back into
normal read mode, meaning the erasure procedure only ever ap-
plies to one cassette.
When the unload lamp lights up, erasure is complete. You can
remove the cassette and use it for a new exposure.
7.16.1 Switching ON/OFF
NOTE The plate reader is designed for continuous operation. It is therefore only neces-
sary to switch it off in the event of prolonged stoppages.
Switching ON
▷ The PC and the application program on the operator's console
have been started up.
▶ Press main switch to the "I" position.

• The pilot lamp on the control panel of the plate reader lights
up.
• The plate reader begins the start-up procedure, which takes a short
time. Then the load lamp lights up.
• The plate reader is ready when the green load lamp lights up.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Switching OFF
▷ Processing of the last cassette is complete.
The unload lamp lights up.

▶ Take out the cassette
▶ Press "End"
• The following appears
▶ With and select "End", then press OK.


Switching off "completely", e.g. for a longer interruption of oper-

ation
▶ Press main switch to the "0" position.
7.16.2 Reading out image plate

The image does not appear on screen until the end of readout.
To read out an image plate you must
• slide the plate cassette into the plate reader,
• have the image plate read out and
• remove the plate cassette again.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Incorrectly inserting the cassette can damage the plate reader. Ensure that the
cassette is not inserted upside down, at an angle or incorrectly aligned. If you used
exposure marks when making the exposure, remove these from the cassette be-
fore inserting it.
WARNING
▶ Check that the load lamp on the control panel of the plate reader
is lit.
NOTE If you are working with a barcode reader, you must first of all assign the plate
cassette to a view using the operator’s console. Otherwise, processing of this plate
cassette will be denied. Remove the cassette again and assign the plate cassette
to a view using the barcode reader on the operator’s console.
If you are working without a barcode reader the load lamp only appears in the
"Examination" section.

▶ Turn the cassette so that the side to be exposed faces down, and
the barcode window goes in first and faces up.
▶ Slide the cassette into the cassette compartment straight along the
feed edge (X).
Ensure that you insert the cassette straight and right along the right feed edge.
WARNING
Never insert the cassette like this:

Wrong! Gap between cassette and feed edge.

Wrong! Cassette is at an angle.
• The cassette slots into place. You will feel slight resistance when in-
serting the cassette, which you must overcome.
• The load lamp on the control panel of the plate reader goes out.
Image plate readout begins automatically.
• The status displays flash on the control panel:
The first arrow flashes during readout. The second arrow flashes
when erasure begins until the image plate is reloaded in the cassette.
Removing a cassette
NOTE While the image plate is being read out the cassette is locked in the plate reader;
the status displays flash.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

▶ Check that the unload lamp on the control panel is flashing:
▶ Pull the cassette in a straight line and slowly out of the cassette
compartment.
• The unload lamp goes out; the load lamp lights up.
• The cassette is ready for use again.

• The exposure which has been read out is added to the patient’s
exposures. Unless you have selected another patient or another
exposure for processing, the exposure which has been read out
appears on the monitor.
7.16.3 Performing secondary erasure

Normally, the image plates are automatically erased after readout. If,
however, an image plate has not been used in the past 8 hours, so-called
secondary erasure is necessary. Here, the cassette is merely erased, and
not read out.
With time, the image plates absorb natural radiation, with the result
that images with low exposure levels have a higher noise component. In

applications with a low radiation dose you should therefore perform

secondary erasure on the image plate after prolonged storage.
▶ Press "Mode change".

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Select "Secondary erasure" with and , then press

OK.


When the unload lamp lights up, erasure is complete.

7.16.4 Performing primary erasure

Normally, the image plates are automatically erased after readout. After
incorrect exposure, however, special, primary erasure is necessary. Here,
the cassette is merely erased, and not read out.
NOTE If the plate reader detects an incorrectly exposed image plate, an error message
to that effect appears. You may not use incorrectly exposed image plates for
around 16 hours after primary erasure.

▶ Press "Mode change".

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Select "Primary erasure" with and , then press OK.


7.17 Exposures with plate cassettes
When the unload lamp lights up, erasure is complete.
7.17.1 Exposure parameters

For the exposure, use a cassette with an erased image plate and use the
same settings on the X-ray generator as with the conventional screen-
film technique.
7.17.2 Positioning the cassette

Place the plate cassettes into the cassette tray of the X-ray unit or for
free exposures as follows:

Exposures with plate cassettes 7.17
▶ Have the front of the cassette (1) facing towards the source of
radiation.
1 2
▶ For exposure, align the cassette so that the green mark (2) on the
front is at the top or to the right. It does not matter whether the
patient is lying in the pa or ap position.
X
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
18 cm x 24 cm format
Cassettes in 18 cm x 24 cm format have two green marks (X) on the
side to be exposed. Align these cassettes as follows: for
• portrait: two green marks are on top
• landscape: single green line is on top

X
X
7.17.3 Handling cassettes and image plates
The cassette may be physically damaged by careless handling. This can lead to
disruptions or the failure of the entire system. If an image plate becomes soiled
its function and, with that, image quality can be greatly impaired. Always handle
cassettes and image plates gently; clean the image plate regularly. Observe the
DANGER
following instructions at all times.
Physical wear and tear

Ensure that the cassette is not damaged when inserting and removing
it. Do not drop the cassette on the floor, as this could scratch it.
Wear gloves when removing the image plate from the cassette to prevent
your fingernails from scratching it.
Image plates must not be bent, banged or otherwise subjected to rough
treatment. Do not use damaged image plates.
Dust and dirt
Always keep the surface of the image plates free from dust and dirt, to
prevent faults or inferior image quality.
Do not place plate cassettes on the floor with the opening facing down.
Otherwise, dirt can get into the cracks of the plate cassette, which soils
the plate reader during readout.
Storing image plates
Observe the following ambient conditions for storage:
• In the sealed packaging: <35°C

• In the opened packaging: <33°C, <80% rel. humidity.
NOTE Store image plates so that they are not exposed to direct sunlight or other sources
of radiation.
Store image plates vertically or horizontally on a flat surface.

Tracking 7.18
Transport conditions
Do not drop boxes of image plates. Do not throw the boxes. Ensure that
the boxes do not come into contact with moisture and are not over-
heated (above 45°C).
Cleaning image plates: see chapter 9.4.3.
7.18 Tracking
7.18.1 Tracking for the SID

Activating tracking
Risk of collision
If you select the auxiliary on the generator control desk, the tube assembly and
column may begin to move. Observe the position of the patient and ensure un-
obstructed paths for the tube assembly and column.
CAUTION
▶ Select auxiliary on the control grip or on the generator control

desk.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Press the button for the selected auxiliary again.

• "Servo active" appears.
• If the tube assembly was not in the exposure position, it will
move to that position.
• If tracking cannot be switched on, an appropriate message ap-
pears. You will find a list of all the possible messages in the
appendix.
Switching on the tracking function

You switch on the tracking function by pressing one of the four buttons
for the auxiliaries twice. The following appears
• "Servo active" or
• "Servo standby" and
• "AT".
For tomography, the tracking is adapted to tomography conditions.

"Servo active":
• If the tube assembly is in the capture range, it moves to the exposure
position.
• The tube assembly follows any adjustment to Bucky height.
"Servo standby":
▶ Move the tube assembly into the capture range. You have reached
it when "Servo active" appears.
Switching off tracking

You can only switch off tracking when "Servo active" is displayed.

7.18 Tracking
▶ Press the button for the auxiliary selected. "Servo off" appears
or
raise or lower the tube assembly manually until "Servo active"
appears.
The tracking function is automatically deactivated if you do any
of the following during tracking
• swivel the tube assembly,
• interrupt the movement of the tube assembly,
• release the central brake,
• release the brake for "Raise/lower tube assembly" or
• rotate the tube assembly round the horizontal axis.
7.18.2 Tracking for the image receptor

▶ Press both buttons.
The carriage moves once with the center of the image receptor
under the radiation beam axis.
If the tube assembly is not positioned above the center of the table,
the carriage moves as far as possible under the radiation beam axis.
The collimators automatically close to an extent that it is impos-
sible to expose beyond the film. If the tube assembly is positioned
too far from the center of the image receptor, the collimator closes
completely and is no longer ready for exposure.
After you press Test "Move CS over Bucky tray" appears.
The system is only enabled when in an idle state. If the image

receptor meets an obstacle, it comes to a standstill and "Maybe
collision with Bucky tray" appears.
7.18.3 Changing auxiliaries

When tracking is switched on you can change the auxiliary. Tracking
remains switched on.

Contents
8 Maintenance .................................................... 8-3
8.1 Obligations of the user ...................................................... 8-3

8.2 Safety checks according to the Medical Device Directive
........................................................................................... 8-3
8.3 Tests by the user ................................................................ 8-3
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

Contents

8 Maintenance
8.1 Obligations of the user

As with any technical appliance this X-ray equipment also requires
• proper operation,
• regular testing by the user,
• regular service and repair.
By taking these preventive actions you maintain the operability and

operational reliability of the system. As the user of an X-ray equipment
you are obliged according to accident prevention regulations, the med-
ical products law and other regulations to take such precautions.
Maintenance consists of tests which the user can perform and main-
tenance which is performed under service agreements, Philips service
orders or by persons explicitly authorised to do so by Philips.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
8.2 Safety checks according to the Medical Device

Directive
The safety checks relate to function and operational reliability. They
must be performed at least every 2 years. These checks constitute part
of preventive maintenance under service agreements from Philips. They
cover
• visual checking for completeness and apparent damage or defects as
well as soiling, sticking parts and wear and tear which may affect
safety,
• testing the necessary monitoring, safety, display and indicating sys-
tems,
• measuring the safety-relevant output parameters,
• checking electrical safety (as per DIN EN 62353 (VDE 0751-1))
and the function of the internal energy supply;
• for the particular product, other special technical tests according to
the generally accepted standards of engineering practice;
• other necessary tests as specified by the manufacturer,
• recording results and filing the test reports in the X-ray system man-
ual (medical products logbook).
8.3 Tests by the user

The user must check the X-ray equipment for apparent defects (see ta-
ble). If operational defects or other deviations from normal operational
behaviour occur, he must switch off the X-ray unit and inform Cus-
tomer Service. He may only resume operation of the X-ray equipment
after it has been repaired. Operation using faulty components may lead
to an increased safety risk or unnecessarily high exposure to radiation.
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Maintenance 8-3

8.3 Tests by the user
Interval Scope Method

Daily Constancy test
Daily Defective display lamps, damaged compo- Inspection
nents, labels and warning signs, oil leaks and
unusual noises from the high voltage gen-
erator
Daily Calibrate laser printer chapter 7.1.25
Weekly All cables and terminals (damage, breakage) Inspection
Monthly Calibrate detector(s) chapter 7.1.24
6 months Centering aids for X-ray tube assembly and Inspection
image receptor (marks, catches, contacts)
8-4 Maintenance DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

Contents
9 Maintenance .................................................... 9-3
9.1 Repairs .............................................................................. 9-3

9.2 Logging ............................................................................. 9-3
9.3 Disinfection ....................................................................... 9-3
9.4 Cleaning ............................................................................ 9-4
9.4.1 Cleaning the system ............................................ 9-4
9.4.2 Cleaning the plate reader .................................... 9-4
9.4.3 Cleaning the image plates ................................... 9-7
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

Contents

9 Maintenance
9.1 Repairs
X-ray units contain mechanical components which are subjected to wear
and tear due to operation.
The correct setting of the electromechanical and electronic assemblies
affects the functioning, image quality, electrical safety and exposure of
the patient and medical personnel to radiation.
Philips recommends:
• that the user perform the tests indicated in the table on a regular
basis,
• have the X-ray unit serviced by the Philips Customer Service at
least once a year. You must have heavily used X-ray equipment
serviced more frequently.
In this way you avoid endangering the patient and you meet your ob-
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
ligations.
By entering into a service agreement with Philips you retain the value
and safety of your X-ray equipment. All the necessary maintenance,
including the safety tests for the purpose of preventive avoidance of
danger and the necessary settings for optimal image quality and mini-
mum exposure to radiation, are performed at regular intervals. Philips
agrees on these intervals with you, taking the legal requirements into
account.
Faulty components which affect the safety of the X-ray equipment must be re-
placed by genuine spare parts.
CAUTION
9.2 Logging
Service and repairs must be entered in the medical products logbook,
including the following data:
• type and extent of work,

• if necessary, details of any changes to ratings or the working zone,
• date, person performing the work, signature.
9.3 Disinfection
The method of disinfection used must conform to the legal regulations
and guidelines regarding disinfection and explosion protection.

9.4 Cleaning
Never use any corrosive, solvent or gaseous disinfectants.
CAUTION
If you use disinfectants which form explosive mixtures of gases, these must first
have evaporated before you switch the X-ray equipment on again.
WARNING
• Before disinfecting the equipment switch off at the mains.

• You may disinfect all parts of the equipment, including the accesso-
ries and connecting cables, by wiping only.
• Disinfection by spraying is not to be recommended because the dis-
infectant may enter the equipment.
• If you perform room disinfection with a nebulizer, you must switch
off the equipment. When the equipment has cooled down, cover it
carefully with a plastic sheet. When the disinfectant mist has settled,
you can remove the plastic sheets and disinfect the equipment by
wiping.
9.4 Cleaning
9.4.1 Cleaning the system

When selecting a detergent bear the following in mind:
You may only clean plastic surfaces with soap and water. If you use other
cleansers (e.g. with a high alcohol content), the material will become
dull or tend to crack. Never use any corrosive, solvent or abrasive de-
tergents or polishes.
When cleaning, please observe the following:
• Before cleaning the equipment switch off at the mains.
• Ensure that no water or liquid can enter the equipment. This will
prevent short-circuits in the electrical system and corrosion on com-
ponents.
• You should wipe enameled parts and aluminium surfaces only with
a damp cloth and mild detergent and then rub with a dry, lint-free
cloth.
• Rub down chrome parts with a dry, lint-free cloth only.
9.4.2 Cleaning the plate reader

The Compano plate reader
NOTE Turn off the plate reader at the main switch before starting cleaning.

Cleaning 9.4
Remove any dust from the outside of the plate reader approximately
every three months. First work with a vacuum cleaner and use a slightly
moist cloth for cleaning. Then remove any remaining moisture with a
dry cloth.
Take out the dust filter on the left side of the device in one piece together
with the filter cover. Afterwards remove the cover first of all and then
take out the filter insert. Clean it with a vacuum cleaner.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The S and S Plus plate readers
NOTE Turn off the plate reader at the main switch before starting cleaning.

9.4 Cleaning
▶ Remove both covers.
▶ Remove the filter from the inside of the upper cover. The lower
cover does not contain a filter.
▶ Clean all filters, covers and air inlets with a vacuum cleaner.
▶ Place the filter in the inside of the upper cover.
▶ Reinsert the covers.
▶ Clean the air outlets with a vacuum cleaner.

Cleaning 9.4
9.4.3 Cleaning the image plates
Always handle the front and back of image plates with great care. Ensure that
the surface of the image plate does not get scratched or otherwise damaged.
WARNING
NOTE A cleaned image plate must be dry before it is used again.

Also handle the cassettes carefully and avoid heavy physical wear and tear – for
instance by bumping or dropping the cassette.
Have the supplied sheet ready which contained the plate in its cardboard
envelope on delivery. Put this underneath when cleaning the plate. Use
lint-free cotton (gauze 100% cotton) or lens cleaning cloths for cleaning.
Once a month remove the image plates from the cassette and check
whether dust or dirt has gathered on the surface.
▶ Unlock the cassette lid by slipping across the locks on the back
of the cassette, and open the lid.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Clean the top side first of all. Move the cleaning cloth over the
image plate gently, as follows:
▶ Then turn over the image plate (X) and clean the other side.
Remove dust and dirt from both sides of the image plate, not only
from the phosphorescent side.

9.4 Cleaning
If specks of dirt cannot be removed by this method, moisten the

cleaning cloth with ethanol. Do not use any other detergents be-
sides this e.g. solvents. If you use ethanol, bear the following in
mind:
▶ Wipe the image plate with a dry cloth afterwards.
If you frequently clean the image plate with ethanol, the edges
may turn yellow with time. However, this does not impair func-
tion.
▶ Next, place the image plate carefully back into the cassette with
the front of the plate facing the same direction as the front of the
cassette.
▶ Before you close the cassette again, ensure that the image plate is
not jutting out of the cassette.
Lock the cassette lid by slipping across the locks on the back of
the cassette.
NOTE The back of HR-BD plates (mammography) and ST-BD plates (pediatrics) has a
yellowish shine and is identified with a green mark. In the cassette, too, there is
a green mark on the top edge, which is located above the green mark on the
image plate. The green mark on the back of the image plate must be aligned with
the green mark on the mammography/pediatrics cassette (X).

Contents
10 Technical data ............................................... 10-3
10.1 System ............................................................................. 10-3

10.2 BuckyDiagnost CS2/4 ..................................................... 10-3
10.2.1 Equipment data ................................................ 10-3
10.2.2 Compatibility ................................................... 10-4
10.2.3 Labels ............................................................... 10-5
10.3 Optimus 50/65/80 .......................................................... 10-6
10.3.1 Electrical data ................................................... 10-6
10.3.2 Setting ranges ................................................... 10-8
.......................................................................... 10-8
10.3.4 Compatibility ................................................. 10-10
10.3.5 Labels ............................................................. 10-10
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
10.4 BuckyDiagnost VS ........................................................ 10-11

10.4.1 Compatibility ................................................. 10-11
10.4.2 Equipment data .............................................. 10-11
10.4.3 Options .......................................................... 10-13
10.4.4 Usable SID, depending on grid data ............... 10-13
10.4.5 Labels ............................................................. 10-14
....................................................................................... 10-15
10.5.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-15
10.5.2 Compatibility ................................................. 10-16
10.5.3 Options .......................................................... 10-17
10.5.4 Labels ............................................................. 10-17
10.6 BuckyDiagnost FS ......................................................... 10-18
10.6.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-18
10.6.2 Compatibility ................................................. 10-19
10.6.3 Labels ............................................................. 10-20
10.7 DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF .............................................. 10-21
10.7.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-21
10.7.2 Compatibility ................................................. 10-21
10.7.3 Labels ............................................................. 10-22

10.8 Single Sided Table TH-S ............................................... 10-23
10.8.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-23
10.8.2 Labels ............................................................. 10-23
10.9 Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M .................................. 10-24
10.9.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-24
10.9.2 Compatibility ................................................. 10-24
10.9.3 Labels ............................................................. 10-24

Contents
10.10 TRAUMOB X .............................................................. 10-25

10.10.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-25
10.10.2 Compatibility ................................................. 10-25
10.10.3 Labels ............................................................. 10-25
10.11 Stitching accessories ....................................................... 10-26
10.11.1 Patient carriage ............................................... 10-26
10.11.2 Shutters .......................................................... 10-28
10.12 Compano ...................................................................... 10-28
10.12.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-28
10.12.2 Labels ............................................................. 10-29
10.13.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-30
10.13.2 Labels ............................................................. 10-31
10.14 Electromagnetic compatibility data ................................ 10-31
10.14.1 Electromagnetic interference immunity –
recommended safety distances ......................... 10-31
10.14.2 Electromagnetic emission ................................ 10-32

10 Technical data
10.1 System
Safety class Class I Type B
Components - Detector, integrated in the DigitalDiagnost table
- Detector, integrated in the DigitalDiagnost wall
stand
- Image processing system
- Tube assembly holder
- Generator
Energy supply
- Mains connection 230 V (+10%, -15%)
- Mains frequency 49 Hz … 61 Hz
- Power consumption <4 A
- Fuse 10 A (generator)
- Heat dissipation <200 W
Environmental specifi-
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
cation
- during operation 18°C … 30°C
- during storage -10°C … 55°C
- rel. humidity 20% … 75%
Compatibility - Ceiling suspension unit BuckyDiagnost CS2/CS4
- Floor stand BuckyDiagnost FS
- Wall stand DigitalDiagnost VM
- Wall stand BuckyDiagnost VS
- Wall stand BuckyDiagnost VE/VT
- Wall stand DigitalDiagnost VE/VT
- Table BuckyDiagnost TH2
- Table DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF
- Table Single Sided Table TH-S
- Table Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M
- Compano plate reader
- Plate readers S, S Plus
- X-ray generators Optimus 50/65/80
- X-ray tubes: SRO 0950, SRO 2550, SRO 33100
10.2 BuckyDiagnost CS2/4

10.2.1 Equipment data
Energy supply
Mains connect.: 230 V +10%/-15%
50 Hz/60 Hz ±2 Hz
Power consumption: ≤1.8 A
Ranges of movement
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Technical data 10-3

10.2 BuckyDiagnost CS2/4
Longitudinal 3530 mm, 3100 mm with tomography
• with extension 6030 mm, 5600 mm with tomography
Transverse 1474 mm BuckyDiagnost CS2

3194 mm BuckyDiagnost CS4
Vertical 1500 mm without 165° stop
Lock-in positions max. 7, can be set by Customer Service
• Vertical SID for BuckyDiagnost TH
• Longitudinal Center BuckyDiagnost TH
• Transverse Center BuckyDiagnost VT at 0°

3 SIDs for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT at 90°
Center BuckyDiagnost TH
Center BuckyDiagnost VT
Range of X-ray tube assembly swivel round the
• vertical axis +180°/-165°, lock-in position every 45° or

+165°/-180°, lock-in position every 45° or
±180°, lock-in position every 45°
Philips recommends limitation to 165°
• horizontal axis 2 x 125°, lock-in position 0°, ±90°
Collimator
manual/automatic
Inherent filtration approx. 0.3 mm Al/100 kV (IEC 60522/1999)
This value depends on the collimator and may
be different; you will find the exact figure on the
label
Max. angle of aperture 2 x 14.4° (usable range depends on the tube)
Rotation ±45°
SID measuring range 70 cm ... 300 cm with automatic collimation
Timer switch for light field in- each programmable
dicator and laser
Added filter 0 mm Al (0.0)
2 mm Al (2.0)
0.1 mm Cu + 1 mm Al (3.7 mm Al equivalent)
0.2 mm Cu + 1 mm Al (6.0 mm Al equivalent)
Tube assembly
Inherent filtration 2.5 mm Al/75 kV (IEC 60522/1999)
Weight
BuckyDiagnost CS2 285 kg
BuckyDiagnost CS4 305 kg
10.2.2 Compatibility
Generators
• Optimus
10-4 Technical data DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

BuckyDiagnost CS2/4 10.2
System components
• X-ray tube housing ROT 350
• Collimator with light field indicator, manual or motorized
• Lock-in positions for longitudinal and transverse movement
• DIAMENTOR
System options in combination with the Optimus 50/65/80 generators

• Cassette size sensing in combination with automatic collimation
• Tracking in combination with automatic collimation
• Tomography in combination with BuckyDiagnost TH or Bucky-
Diagnost TF and the Optimus 50/65/80 generators
Accessories for tube carriers

• BuckyDiagnost Trauma II
• Rails for cable carrier CS
• Cable carrier CS
• Rail extension
10.2.3 Labels
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
The system is put together according to the customer's requirements,

so the labels shown are only samples. Country-specific labels are only
shown in the corresponding Instructions for Use.
No. Contents No. Contents
1 BuckyDiagnost CS label 1A Logo
1B Address
1C Type number
1D Electrical data
1E IEC 60601-1
1F IEC 60601-2-32
1G CE
1H UL or CSA
1I CCC
1J Support add. label

10.3 Optimus 50/65/80

2
3 X-ray tube label
4 Ceiling rails label 4A Type number

4B Logo
4C Address
5 Longitudinal carriage label
6 Telescopic support CS label
7 BuckyDiagnost system label
8 Collimator label
9 Tube holder add. label
10 Control grip label 10A Type number

10B Address
10C FDA
10D, E Laser label
10.3 Optimus 50/65/80
10.3.1 Electrical data

10.3.1.1 Overview
Optimus 50 Optimus 65 Optimus 80
Safety class 1
EMC emissions Group 1, class A
Energy supply 400 V ±10%, 50 Hz und 60 Hz, 3 phases
Mains resistance/max. ≤0.3 Ω/145 A ≤0.2 Ω/190 A ≤0.3 Ω/230 A
current input

Optimus 50/65/80 10.3

Max. current input is Generator output 50 kW 65 kW 80 kW
reached under the fol-
lowing conditions:
Technique kV-mAs
Focal spot large
High voltage 77 kV 81 kV 80 kV
mAs product 65 mAs 80 mAs 100 mAs
Exposure time 0.1 s
Electric power (IEC 50 kW 65 kW 80 kW
60601-2-7)
High-voltage generation Converter
Ondulation Direct voltage
Acquisition Max. voltage 150 kV
Nominal elec. power 50 kW 65 kW 80 kW
(100 kV; 0.1 s)
Max. electr. power 50 kW 65 kW 80 kW
650 mA at 70 kV 900 mA at 70 kV 1100 mA at 70 kV
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

Fluoroscopy Max. voltage 110 kV (125 kV, can be programmed by Customer Service)
Permanent power (for a 500 W 500 W 500 W
realistic ratio between (6 images/min at 50 kW; (6 images/min at 65 kW; (6 images/min at 80 kW;
fluoroscopy and expo- 0.1 s) 0.1 s) 0.1 s)
sure), classification acc.
to Medical Device Direc-
tive 93/42/EEC-IIb

• kV, continuously falling load
• kV, mA, constant current operation, automatic exposure control
(two-factor technique)
• TDC, automatic exposure control with tomography (dose-rate con-
trolled tomography)
• kV, mAs, constant load (two-factor technique)
• kV, mAs, s, constant load (three-factor technique)

• kV, mA, s, constant load (three-factor technique)

10.3 Optimus 50/65/80
10.3.2 Setting ranges

Radiography without au- Tube voltage 40 kV ... 150 kV, adjustable in steps of 1 kV or according to a sequence the steps
tomatic exposure con- of which roughly correspond to an exposure increment1. In the case of tubes
trol (AEC) with lower maximum tube voltage this is limited accordingly.
Tube current For kV-mA-s and kV- For kV-mA-s and kV- For kV-mA-s and kV-
mAs techniques this can mAs techniques this can mAs techniques this can
be adjusted in steps of be adjusted in steps of be adjusted in steps of
25%1, 12% or 6% 25%1, 12% or 6% 25%1, 12% or 6%
1 mA ... 650 mA ... 1 mA ... 900 mA ... 1 mA ... 1100 mA ...
mAs 0.5 mAs ... 850 mAs adjustable in steps of 25%1, 12% or 6%
Compliance range as per IEC 60601-2-7: 2.0 mAs ... 850 mAs
Exposure times 1 ms ... 6 s (16 s) adjustable in steps of 25%1, 12% or 6%
Radiography with AEC mAs2 0.5 mAs ... 600 mAs
Switching times 1 ms ... 4 s
Density correction adjustable in steps of 25%1, 12% or 6%
Tomography mAs 0.5 mAs ... 850 mAs adjustable in steps of 25%1, 12% or 6%
Switching times 1 ms ... 6 s (16 s) adjustable in steps of 25%1, 12% or 6%
Tomography with auto- mAs 0.5 mAs ... 600 mAs adjustable in steps of 25%1, 12% or 6%
matic exposure control
(TDC)
Switching times 1 ms ... 6 s
Fluoroscopy Tube voltage 40 kV ... 125 kV, via kV/mA characteristic curves
Tube current 0.1 mA ... 6 mA, via kV/mA characteristic curves
Exposures for therapy Tube voltage 40 kV ... 141 kV
simulation
Tube current 0.2 mA ... 20 mA ...
Time 65 s
1
Default values:
±25% corresponds to ±1 exposure density increment
±12% density correction corresponds to ±0.5 exposure density incre-
ments.
2
The maximum mAs value can be set lower by Customer Service.
10.3.3.1 Compliance
with the requirements of IEC 60601-2-7 applying the IEC test condi-
tions.
Current-time reference product
Reference value for the compliance range of linearity of the emitted
radiation. This table applies to tubes with X-ray generator nominal

Optimus 50/65/80 10.3
power and an exposure time of 100 ms at 100 kV. For tubes with low
focus power, the current-time reference product must be converted ac-
cordingly.
Current-time reference product
50 kW 65 kW 80 kW
70 kV, 320 mA 32 mAs
70 kV, 400 mA 40 mAs
70 kV, 500 mA 50 mAs
100 kV, 250 mA 25 mAs
100 kV, 320 mA 32 mAs
100 kV, 400 mA 40 mAs
150 kV, 160 mA 16 mAs
150 kV, 200 mA 20 mAs
150 kV, 250 mA 25 mAs
Requirement Compliance
Reproducibility of emitted radiation is observed
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Linearity of emitted radiation in relation to current-time in the range of ≥ 2 mAs

product
Linearity of emitted radiation assuming consecutive set- over the entire range
tings or settings with a factor of ≤2 of settings
Consistency of emitted radiation during automatic ex- is observed
posure control
Accuracy of the X-ray tube load factors
• Tube voltage is observed
• Tube current is observed
• Tube load time is observed
• Current-time product is observed
• Current-time reference product is observed
10.3.3.2 Tolerances of the indicated X-ray tube load factors

Exposure
(Typical range of application)

Tube voltage ±5%, additional ±1 kV
Tube current-time product ±3%, additional ±0.5 mAs
Tube current ±5%, additional ±0.5 mA
mAs post-exposure display in kV tech- ±3%, additional ±0.5 mAs
nique
Post-exposure time display ±3%, additional ±0.5 ms

10.3 Optimus 50/65/80
Exposure time
• Optimus 50 ±5%, additional ±0.5 ms
for I<10 mA ±5%, additional ±25 ms
• Optimus 65/80 ±5%, additional ±0.5 ms
for I<10 mA ±5%, additional ±25 ms
for I≤2 mA ±5%, additional +25 ms/-85 ms
Fluoroscopy
(Typical range of application)
Tube voltage ±5%, additional ±1 kV
Tube current ±5%, additional ±0.1 mA
You can operate any Optimus with the following tubes from Philips.
Mixed operation is possible.
Philips recommends the following standard tubes:
RO 1648
RO 1750
SRO 0951
SRO 2550
SRO 33100
For other tubes which can be connected up consult Philips Customer
Service.
You can connect up the Patient Data Organizer (PDO) to any Optimus.
For more information please contact Philips Customer Service.
10.3.5 Labels
2

BuckyDiagnost VS 10.4

1
2 (A) (B) (G) A Logo

(C) (D) (H) B Address
(E) (F) (I)
C Type number
D Technical data
E IEC 60601-1
F IEC 60601-1-32
G CE
H UL or CSA
I CCC
10.4 BuckyDiagnost VS
Generators
• Optimus
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

Conformity with IEC 60601-1 • Safety class 3
• Remote control (optional)
• Applied part of type B1
• Degree of protection against harmful in-
gress of water: IPXO
• Designed for continuous operation
• Service life: 300000 exposures or 10 years
Grid Carbon fiber cover

Pink: 36 l/cm, f0 = 110 cm, r = 8
Red: 36 l/cm, f0 = 110 cm, r = 12
Yellow: 36 l/cm, f0 = 140 cm, r = 8
Blue: 36 l/cm, f0 = 140 cm, r = 12
Green: 36 l/cm, f0 = 180 cm, r = 12
Interchangeable grid Standard (not with basic version)

Cassette size sensing Optional (not with digital detector)

Cassette sizes [cm/inch]2 18 x 24 / ––––––

18 x 43 / 7 x 17
–––––– / 8 x 10
20 x 40 / ––––––
24 x 24 / 9.5 x 9.5
24 x 30 / ––––––
–––––– / 10 x 12
–––––– / 11 x 14
30 x 30 / 12 x 12
30 x 35 / ––––––
30 x 40 / ––––––
35 x 35 / 14 x 14
35 x 43 / 14 x 17
40 x 40 / ––––––
Front panel, dimensions (H x 575 mm x 596 mm
W)
Distance front panel – film 54 mm
Al equivalent 0.55 mm ± 0.1 mm
Basic unit
• Height/height adjustment 206 cm / 150 cm
• Front panel vertical lower 30 cm

position (center of image
receptor)
• Front panel horizontal low- 54.2 cm

er position
• Tilt angle -20° … 90°
Weight 130 kg ... 255 kg, depending on version

Cassette holder • all cassettes from 18 cm x 24 cm to 35 cm
x 43 cm
• compatible with all versions of the Bucky-
Diagnost VS
1
This X-ray equipment complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Op-
eration is subject to the following two conditions:
• This X-ray equipment may not cause harmful interference and
• This X-ray equipment must be shielded from harmful interference
including interference which can cause undesirable reactions.
Explanation of Class B of the FCC rules: This X-ray equipment has

been tested and complies with the limits set forth for Class B digital
devices (Part 15 of the FCC rules). These limits were fixed to provide
effective protection against harmful interference. This X-ray equipment

generates, uses and can emit transmission energy. This can cause harm-
ful interference with radio communications devices if the X-ray equip-
ment is not operated according to the FCC rules. Nonetheless, the
possibility of interference arising under certain conditions cannot be
ruled out. If this X-ray equipment causes harmful interference with ra-
dio or television receivers (noticeable when turning on/off), the user can
attempt to eliminate it as follows:
• Move or rotate receiving aerial.
• Increase distance between X-ray equipment and receiver.

BuckyDiagnost VS 10.4
• Connect the X-ray equipment to a different electric circuit than the

receiver.
• Consult the dealer or a radio/TV specialist.
2
The standard sets forth the measurements but not the design. There-
fore individual cassettes with an unusual design may "not fit" despite
conforming to the standard, e.g. "3M".
10.4.3 Options
• Wireless remote control in combination with motorized vertical
movement
• Floor attachment for installation anywhere in the room
System options
10.4.4 Usable SID, depending on grid data

Lp/cm Ratio f0 [cm] Min. SID Max. SID
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
[cm] [cm]
36 12 110 97 129
36 12 140 115 180
36 12 180 140 252
36 8 110 97 150
36 8 140 103 205

10.4.5 Labels
2
1
11
8 3
10
4, 12
6, 7
5


1
2 Wall stand Segment control A Logo

unit B Address
(A) (B) C Type number
(C) (D) D Barcode
3 Bucky unit 2 digital A Logo

(A) (B) B UL or CSA
(C) (D) C Type number
D Barcode
4 BuckyDiagnost VS A Logo
(A) (B) (G) B Address
(C) (D) (H) (I)
C Type number
(E) (F) (J)
D Data information
E IEC 60601-1
F IEC 60601-2-32
G FDA
H UL or CSA
I CE
J IEC
5 Motorized stand A Logo
(A) (B) B Address
D Barcode

DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact/VM (horizontal) 10.5

6 BuckyDiagnost VS A Logo
(A) (B) B Address
(C) (D)
C Type number
D Data information
(E) (F)
E IEC 60601-1
(G)
F IEC 60601-2-32
(H) G FDA
(I) H UL or CSA
(J) I Remote control
(K)
J WEEE
K CE
7 Motorized tiltable unit A Logo
(A) (B) B Address
D Barcode
8 Display of wall stand A Logo
(A) (B) B Address
D UL or CSA
9 Remote control A FCC/UL
(A) B CSA
(B)
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
10 Holder of remote control Address
11 Babix holder A Logo

(A) (B) B Address
D CE
12 Motorized vertical unit A Logo
(A) (B) B Address
D Barcode
10.5 DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact/VM

(horizontal)

Cassette size sensing Standard (option with VM Compact)
Interchangeable grid Standard, shelf for 2 more grids

Dimensions of front panel (W x H) 596 mm x 575 mm
Distance front panel - film 54 mm
Al equivalent ≤0.55 mm
Height 248 cm
Vertical movement 156 cm

Minimum height above ground

- center, vertical 30 cm
- center, horizontal 50 cm
- angle -20° … 90°
Compatible optional accessories
Only the accessories listed here are approved by Philips Medical Sys-
tems. Information about further accessories and their installation/dis-
mantling can be found in the Instructions for Use "Radiographic
accessories".
DigitalDiagnost TH
• Lateral cassette holder
• Back rest
• Belt compressor
DigitalDiagnost VS
• Accessory rails
• Spacers
• Grips for positioning patient (grips, stretch grip)
• BABIX holders
• Additional remote control
DigitalDiagnost VM
• Additional remote control (not for VM Compact)
• Stretch grips
Compatibility
(not with VM Compact)
DigitalDiagnost TH
• Grid:
- 36 lp/cm, r = 8, f0 = 110 cm
- 36 lp/cm, r = 12, f0 = 110 cm
• Additional tomography unit
• Tracking
• Footswitch block
• BuckyDiagnost CS 2, CS 4
• DigitalDiagnost VE/VT
• Optimus 50/65/80
• Table tops:
- Kevlar (<0.75 mm Al equivalent)
- Getalit (<0.75 mm Al equivalent)
• Second tableside control desk

DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact/VM (horizontal) 10.5
10.5.3 Options
Grid GRP, 36 lp/cm
- f0 = 100 cm, r = 8, r = 12
- f0 = 140 cm, r = 8, r = 12
- f0 = 180 cm, r = 12
System expansions - Flat screen

- Barcode reader
- RIS interface for two-way data transfer
- Optimus 65/80
- DICOM Print
10.5.4 Labels
1 2
3
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
5
6

1 Patient data display A Logo
(A) (B) B Address
D UL or CSA
2 Tube arm A Logo
(A) (B) B Address
D Barcode
3 Bucky Unit 2 Digital A Logo
(A) (B) B Barcode
D UL or CSA
4 Segment control unit A Logo

(A) (B) B Address
(C) (D)
C Type number
D Electrical data
(E) (F)
E IEC 60601-1
(G) (H)
F IEC 60601-2-32
(I) G UL or CSA
H UL or CSA
I WEEE
J CE

10.6 BuckyDiagnost FS

5 Wall stand A Logo
(A) (B) B Address
D Barcode
6 DigitalDiagnost VM A Logo
(A) (B) B Address
(C) (D)
C Type number
D Electrical data
(E) (F)
E IEC 60601-1
(G)
F IEC 60601-2-32
(H) (I) G FDA
(J) (K) H UL or CSA
I IEC
J CE
K WEEE
Energy supply
Mains connect.: 230 V +10%/-15%
50 Hz/60 Hz ±2 Hz
Power consumption: ≤2.5 A
Ranges of movement
Longitudinal 2760 mm
• with extension 4130 mm
Transverse (optional) 150 mm

Vertical 1600 mm
Lock-in positions Can be set by Customer Service:
• Longitudinal Center BuckyDiagnost TH2/TF

Center BuckyDiagnost VT "horizontal"
3 SIDs for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT "vertical"
Range of X-ray tube assembly swivel round the
• vertical axis ±90°, lock-in position at 0°, ±90°

(tube arm swivel)
• horizontal axis of the tube 2 x 125°, lock-in position 0°, ±90°

arm
Collimator
manual/automatic
Inherent filtration approx. 0.3 mm Al/100 kV (IEC 60522/1999)
This value depends on the collimator and may
be different; you will find the exact figure on the
label

BuckyDiagnost FS 10.6
Max. angle of aperture 2 x 14.4° (usable range depends on the tube)

Rotation ±45°
SID measuring range 70 cm ... 205 cm with automatic collimation
Timer switch for light field in- each programmable
dicator and laser
Added filter 0 mm Al (0.0)
2 mm Al (2.0)
0.1 mm Cu + 1 mm Al (3.7)
0.2 mm Cu + 1 mm Al (6.0)
Tube assembly
Inherent filtration 2.5 mm Al/75 kV (IEC 60522/1999)
Weight
285 kg
Generators
• Optimus
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
System components
• X-ray tube housing ROT 350
• Collimator with light field indicator, manual or motorized
• Lock-in positions for longitudinal and transverse movement
• DIAMENTOR
System options in combination with the Optimus 50/65/80 generators

• Tomography in combination with BuckyDiagnost FS S, Bucky-
Diagnost TH2 or BuckyDiagnost TF and the Optimus 50/65/80
generators
Accessories for tube carriers

• Rail extension for BuckyDiagnost FS S and BuckyDiagnost FS C.

10.6.3 Labels
3
4 6
8
7


1 X-ray tube
2 BuckyDiagnost system label
4
5 BuckyDiagnost FS A Logo
B Address
C Type number
D Electrical data
E IEC 60601-1
F IEC 60601-2-32
G CE
H UL or CSA
I CCC
J Type number stand FS

DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF 10.7

6 Tube carrier add.
7 Collimator
8 Control grip A Type number

B Address
C FDA
D, E Laser label
10.7 DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF

Height 51.5 cm … 91.5 cm
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Density equivalent <0.75

Table top - 240 cm x 75 cm
- 240 cm x 85 cm (optional)
Table top movements
longitudinally ±60 cm
transversely ±13 cm
±18 cm (optional)
Max. load 210 kg
• Additional tomography unit
• Tracking
• Footswitch block
• BuckyDiagnost CS 2, CS 4
• DigitalDiagnost VS/VM
• Optimus 50/65/80
• Table tops:
- Kevlar (<0.75 mm Al equivalent)

- Getalit (<0.75 mm Al equivalent)
• Second tableside control desk

10.7 DigitalDiagnost TH2/TF
10.7.3 Labels


1 Table top A Logo
(A) (B) B Address
D FDA
2 (on rear) A Logo
DigitalDiagnost TH2 B Address
(A) (B) C Type number
(C) (D)
D Electrical data
E IEC 60601-1
(E) (F)
F IEC 60601-2-32
(G) (H)
G UL or CSA
(I) H WEEE
I CE
3 Digital Bucky unit for TH2 A Logo
(A) (B) B CSA
D Barcode
4 (head)
(feet)
5 (on the cassette tray) A Logo

Bucky unit cassette size sens- B Address
ing C Type number
(A) (B) D UL or CSA
(C) (D) E Barcode
F Electrical data
(E) (F)

Single Sided Table TH-S 10.8
10.8 Single Sided Table TH-S

Length 260 cm
Width 75 cm
Height 51 cm … 91 cm
Thickness of table top 5.4 cm
Al equivalent of table top <1.5 mm Al
Weight 170 kg
Max. load 225 kg
10.8.2 Labels
1
2
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
3 4


1 TH-S A Logo
(A) (B) B Address
(C) (D)
C Type number
D Electrical data
(E) (F)
E IEC 60601-1
(G) (H)
F IEC 60601-2-32
(I) G UL or CSA
H WEEE
I CE
2 Equipotential bonding
3 Table top TH-S A Logo

(A) (B) B Address
D FDA
4 Foot TH-S

10.9 Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M
10.9 Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M

Height 590 mm … 855 mm
Length 2200 mm
Transverse movement ±100 mm
Max. load 225 kg
Brakes A pedal on either side for releasing and lock-
ing
- castors
- floating table top
Attenuation equivalent of table ≤1.2 mm Al equivalent (100 kV; 2.7 mm Al HVL)
top
• DigitalDiagnost VE/VT
• DigitalDiagnost VM
• DigitalDiagnost VM Compact
10.9.3 Labels
1
2

1 (A) (B) A Logo
(C) (D)
B Address
C Type number
D FDA
2 (A) (B) A Logo
(C) (D)
B Address
C Type number
(E) (F)
D CE
(G)
E UL or CSA
F IEC 60601-2-32
G WEEE

TRAUMOB X 10.10
10.10 TRAUMOB X

Table top
Dimensions 600 mm x 2290 mm
Tilt 10°
Attenuation equiva- 0.69 mm Al equivalent
lent
Weight 51 kg
Max. load 135 kg
• BuckyDiagnost Trauma
• BuckyDiagnost CS 2/4
• Mobile cassette stand
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
• C-arm
• Mobile exposure units
10.10.3 Labels
1 2
3
4
5

1
STOP
2 Warning
3 Certification
A Type number
B Logo
C Manufacturer

10.11 Stitching accessories

4
YES
NO
5 (A) (B) A Logo

(C) (D)
B Manufacturer
C Type number
D CE
10.11 Stitching accessories
10.11.1 Patient carriage
10.11.1.1 Equipment data

For further information please refer to chapter .
Height 1990 mm
Width 1110 mm
Length 881 mm
Weight 1.9 kg
Max. load 225 kg
10.11.1.2 Compatibility
• BuckyDiagnost VE/VT
• DigitalDiagnost VS
• DigitalDiagnost VM/VM Compact/VM (horizontal)

Stitching accessories 10.11
10.11.1.3 Labels
1 2
1 1
3
4
1
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
2 Al equivalent
3 Makrolon plate Type number
4 Patient carriage A Logo

B Address
C Type number
(A) (B) (G)
D CE
E UL or CSA
(C) (D) (H)
F IEC 60601-2-32
(E) (F)
G FDA
H WEEE

10.12 Compano
10.11.2 Shutters
10.11.2.1 Labels
1 2
2
2
3
SID max. 3 meter / 9.84 feet
1 4 1 SID max. 2.1 meter / 6.89 feet 3

1 Stitching shutter 3m A Logo
(A) B Type number
(B)
2 Stitching shutter 2.1m A Logo

(A) B Type number
(B)
10.12 Compano

Plate throughput max. 90 plates/h (18 cm x 24 cm)
Cassette release 40 s ... 64 s, depending on cassette size
Gray scale depth when reading 12 bit/pixel (4096 gray scales)
Load power 0.6 kVA
Heat dissipation 230 W
Dimensions (w x h x d) 550 mm x 1065 mm x 515 mm
Weight 155 kg
Cassette sizes
The plate reader can be configured to cassette sizes in inches or metric.

Metric setting Inch setting
35 cm x 43 cm 14" x 17"
35 cm x 35 cm 14" x 14"
24 cm x 30 cm 10" x 12"
18 cm x 24 cm 8" x 10"

Compano 10.12
Processing times
The following data are based on the processing of one image plate from
automatic unloading from the cassette to loading after processing.
Cassette sizes Processing times
35 cm x 43 cm (14" x 17") approx. 56 plates/h
Image sizes in pixels

Cassette Standard matrix High resolution
sizes
Matrix Pixels/mm Matrix Pixels/mm
35 cm x 43 cm 1760 by 2140 5 3520 by 4280 10
35 cm x 35 cm 1760 by 1760 5 3520 by 3520 10
24 cm x 30 cm 1576 by 1976 6.7 2364 by 2964 10
18 cm x 24 cm 1770 by 2370 10 1770 by 2370 10
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
14" x 17" 1760 by 2140 5 3520 by 4280 10

14" x 14" 1760 by 1760 5 3520 by 3520 10
10" x 12" 1670 by 2010 6.7 2505 by 3015 10
8" x 10" 2000 by 2510 10 2000 by 2510 10
Gray scale depth when reading: 12 bit/pixel
10.12.2 Labels
1
2 1 4
2 1
3
2
1 HHS label #1 3 EN60825-1:1996

Class 1 device
2 EN60825-1:1996 4 HHS certification and ID
Class IIIb label


Plate throughput max. 92 plates/h (18 cm x 24 cm)
Cassette release 39 s - 82 s, depending on cassette size
Gray scale depth when reading 12 bit/pixel
Load power 0.6 kW
Heat dissipation 292 W
Dimensions (w x h x d) 590 mm x 810 mm x 380 mm
Weight 99 kg
Cassette sizes
The plate reader can be configured to cassette sizes in inches or metric.
Metric setting Inch setting
35 cm x 43 cm 14'' x 17''
35 cm x 35 cm 14'' x 14''
15 cm x 30 cm
24 cm x 30 cm 10'' x 12''
18 cm x 24 cm 8'' x 10''
Processing times
The following data is based on the processing of one image plate from
automatic unloading from the cassette to loading after processing.
Cassette sizes Processing times [plates/h]
S S Plus
35 cm x 43 cm (14'' x 17'') approx. 43 approx. 62
Image sizes in pixels


sizes
35 cm x 43 cm 1760 by 2140 5 3520 by 4280 10
35 cm x 35 cm 1760 by 1760 5 3520 by 3520 10
24 cm x 30 cm 1576 by 1976 6.7 2364 by 2964 10
18 cm x 24 cm 1770 by 2370 10 1770 by 2370 10
14'' x 17'' 1760 by 2140 5 3520 by 4280 10

Electromagnetic compatibility data 10.14

sizes
14'' x 14'' 1760 by 1760 5 3520 by 3520 10
10'' x 12'' 1670 by 2010 6.7 5205 by 3015 10
8'' x 10'' 2000 by 2510 10 2000 by 2510 10
Gray scale depth when reading: 12 bit/pixel
10.13.2 Labels
2 5
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
3 4
1
1 IEC 60825-1: 2001 3 Manufacturer

Electrical Data
CE
2 HHS certification and 4, 5 IEC 60825-1: 2001
identification EN 60825-1: 2002
Class IIIb label
10.14 Electromagnetic compatibility data
10.14.1 Electromagnetic interference immunity – recommended

safety distances
(between portable and mobile HF telecommunications equipment

and this system)
The system is designed for operation in an electromagnetic environment
in which HF interference is controlled. The user of the system can help
prevent electromagnetic interference by observing the minimum dis-
tance between mobile HF telecommunications equipment (transmit-
ters) and the system. This depends on the output of the communications
equipment, as given below.

10.14 Electromagnetic compatibility data
Nominal power of the Safe distance depending on the transmitter frequency [m]
transmitter [W]
150 kHz … 80 MHz 80 MHz … 800 MHz 800 MHz … 2.5 GHz
d = (3.5/3)P1/2 d = (3.5/3)P1/2 d = (7/3)P1/2
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.37 0.37 0.74
1 1.17 1.17 2.33
10 3.67 3.67 7.38
100 11.66 11.66 23.33
For transmitters whose maximum nominal power is not given in the

above table, the recommended safe distance d in meters [m] can be
calculated using the equation for the relevant column, where P is the
maximum nominal power of the transmitter in watts [W] as specified
by the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE ▪ If the value is exactly 80 MHz or 800 MHz the higher frequency range applies
in each case.
▪ These guidelines may not apply in all situations. The propagation of electro-
magnetic effects is influenced by absorption by and reflection off buildings,
objects and people.
10.14.2 Electromagnetic emission

Radiated noise Compliance Electromagnetic environment –
measurements guidance
HF emission acc. Group 1 This system uses HF energy solely for
to CISPR 11 its internal functioning. Its HF emissions
are therefore very low, and it is very
unlikely to interfere with electronic ap-
paratus in the vicinity.

Contents
11 Annex ............................................................. 11-3
11.1 Glossary of terms ............................................................. 11-3

11.2 Messages on the monitor ................................................. 11-7
11.3 Messages in control grip display ....................................... 11-9
11.4 Messages in generator control desk display .................... 11-11
11.5 Screen-film combinations .............................................. 11-12
11.6 If the system is not ready for exposure ........................... 11-12
11.7 Exposure table ............................................................... 11-12
11.8 Button symbols and their meaning ................................ 11-15
11.9 Switching off the system – in a few words ...................... 11-17
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
11.10 The hierarchy of levels on the display ............................ 11-17

11.11 Symbols for image processing ........................................ 11-19
11.12 The dose indicator ......................................................... 11-19
11.13 Energy characteristic ...................................................... 11-22
11.14 Reproduction scale ........................................................ 11-22
11.15 Erasure .......................................................................... 11-23

Contents

11 Annex
11.1 Glossary of terms

ACQ Acquisition
AEC Automatic Exposure Control
APR Anatomic Programmed Radiography; you can select the exposure type with the APR buttons. The exposure
parameters are then set automatically.
Bottom position see Center position
Button A soft key shown on screen that can be "pressed" by clicking with the mouse.
Center position You can perform collimation in three different ways:
top edge fixed
Top position
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Center position
centre fixed
Bottom position
bottom edge fixed
Click on this "Pressing" a soft key or activating an element on screen by pressing the mouse button
Detector This consists of a photoconductor which registers the incident X-radiation.
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine. Medical technology standard for data formatting and
transfer.
Exposure parameters The X-ray exposure is determined by the three exposure parameters: Tube voltage (kV), Tube current
(mA) and Exposure time (ms).
Focal spot The point of the anode on which the electrons are focused.
Help text A text that can be called up from certain windows and offers information about ongoing sequences of steps.
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Annex 11-3

Images The detector produces two types of images:

The unprocessed image (pre image) has full resolution, is stored on the hard disk and is used for further
processing. It is only subject to a number of detector-specific corrections. This image is completely un-
processed; it is "invisible" to a certain extent.
The control image is an image with reduced resolution. It is only used for control purposes during acquis-
ition. After confirmation this image is obsolete and no longer of any use. The unprocessed image then only
serves as the basis for all future image processing.
The resulting image, the final or processed image (post image), is transmitted via DICOM and printed out.
It encompasses all processing steps in terms of the specific anatomy and type of display. This includes
• ROI densities (density of region of interest)
• Density of abdomen (only in lung mode) – Lookup table
• Overall contrast (gamma)
• Detail contrast (contrast of small structures)
• Edge enhancement with variable kernel size
• Noise reduction
11-4 Annex DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

Glossary of terms 11.1
Images
(continued) UNIQUE image processing (optional)
• Density
Select the density value for the region of interest.
• Gamma
This variable adjusts global contrast so that the image corresponds to a film image with a corresponding
gamma.
• Structure boost
Structures whose pixels only diverge slightly from adjacent pixels are boosted, the greater this value is.
Structures with low contrast become more visible as they are boosted more than structures with good
contrast.
• Balance
This value defines which structure preference is to be primarily influenced by "Structure boost". It is
thus possible to specify that primarily fine details or major bone fractures are to be boosted.
• Noise compensation
The more structures are boosted, the more the observer will be bothered by image noise as noise is
particularly prevalent in low-dose areas. To suppress this phenomenon it is possible to reduce structure
boost in these low-dose areas (light areas) by increasing the parameter "Noise compensation". If you
view a processed thorax exposure, the noise from the mediastinum will seem greater than from the
adjacent ribs. An increase in "Noise compensation" reduces the boost of the smaller structures and
thus to a reduction in noise in the light areas.
• Expert control >>
Switch on expert control
These function are reserved for specialists.
• Curve
These curves influence the general appearance of the image in terms of global contrast and global
brightness. A changed curve does not directly influence the image structures (detail contrast); this is
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
brought about by other parameters. The right choice of density curve is a decisive factor for avoiding
clipping in black and white areas. The following density curves are available for selection: LIN: Linear
curve SWL: S-Wide-Latitude SCL: S-Chest-Latitude FB: Film-like Bones FC: Film-like Chest
• Detail contrast
This variable influences the image structures. It does not alter the global contrast but the contrast of
the structures in terms of their environment. When detail contrast and gamma are identical, the be-
havior corresponds to display on film (if contrast balance = 1 and structure boost = 0).
• Contrast balance
This variable influences contrast in terms of local brightness/density.
1: The detail contrast is at its maximum only within the ROI; the detail contrast is reduced in the light
and dark areas (as on film).
0: The detail contrast of all brightness/density points is identical (harmonized contrast). You can use
the slide control for infinitely variable adjustment between these two extremes.
• W.C. Limit
Structures with low contrast (differences in pixel values) can be increased using the parameter "Struc-
ture boost". W.C. Limit defines what is considered as "weak contrast" (generally contrast <3% of a
decade). This is not a "precise" definition as the decrease in the boost towards stronger contrast is not
clear-cut.
• S.C. Limit
At areas with great differences in contrast (e.g. at the edges of metal implants) contrast boost must be
limited to avoid artefacts. You can use this variable to select the contrast in % at the area where
structure boost is to be reduced. A value of 7% is generally suitable here.
• S.B. Offset
S.B. Offset is an additional structure boost regardless of the structure preference value selected.
• Noise Limit
This value determines the degree of enhancement compensation in the density area. The values are
decadic. Limits:
0.1: Noise compensation only acts on the lowest density values
3.0: Noise compensation acts on all density values

Images • Noise Step

(continued) This value determines the gamma at the transition between noise-compensated and non noise-com-
pensated regions in the dose area.
0.1: step-by-step transition (risk of artefacts)
2.0: transition in an S-shaped function over 2 decades.
• Noise Band
This value determines the degree of noise compensation in the spatial frequency range.
0.5: maximum noise compensation for the finest structures, otherwise no noise compensation.
3.0: maximum noise compensation for the finest structures, medium noise compensation for medium-
sized structures, no noise compensation for the largest structures.
Measure Field: Collimation display. Four collimation formats are available:
100% Full format (98/98%)
50% Half format (98/50%)
25% Quarter format (25/25%)
20% Gap (20/80%)
After application of these image processing steps the resulting processed image is available for
• Local viewing
• Export via DICOM; in this case the processed image is adjusted according to the defaults of the export
filter (defaults of Customer Service) in order to adapt the image to the display medium connected
• Transfer to a local printer; in this case the processed image is adjusted according to the defaults of the
printer
• Transfer to a local printer which is connected to an EasyVision; in this case the processed image is
adjusted according to the defaults of the printer connected to EasyVision
• Local storage on storage medium (optional). Here the processed image is saved without any further
adjustments. Unprocessed images can also be saved on the same medium.
Service life:
• Control image
is deleted immediately after "Confirmation"
• Unprocessed image
as long as possible, depends on the capacity of the storage medium
• Processed image
deleted automatically if no longer of any use for further processing
kV-mA-s technique Three-button setting of exposure data
Tube voltage (kV), Tube current (mA) and Exposure time (ms) have to be set for the X-ray exposure.
kV-mAs technique Automatic two-button technique
Tube voltage (kV) and Current-time product (mAs) have to be set for the X-ray exposure.
kV technique Automatic single-button technique
Only Tube voltage (kV) has to be set for the X-ray exposure. The other exposure data are determined by
the automatic exposure control (AMPLIMAT).
PACS Picture Archiving and Communication System.
Password The password gives the operator access to the system.
Patient data All data belonging to a patient.

Messages on the monitor 11.2
Print mode Print mode determines the combination of layout and scale, e.g. 1 in 1 (one image on one film) or 2 in 1
(two images on one film) etc. In conjunction with the information in the window "HCU scale" print mode
decides how the layout and scale are to be printed. The appropriate film size and the appropriate format
(portrait, landscape) are selected automatically according to the following rules:
1. The scale is to stay the same
2. - As little film as possible is to be used
- The fewest possible black areas are to be generated
- Unused film areas are possible but should be avoided
3. No information should be "cut off" from the image, even if this results in more film being used (black
areas, unused film areas); in this case there is automatic switchover to a smaller scale.
4. If both portrait and landscape are available for selection, portrait is used automatically as this fits in the
light box better.
The user thus has no opportunity of selecting a specific film orientation or a specific film size; this is done
by the system.
The third rule means that if collimation is increased by a few millimeters, there is automatic switchover to
a much larger film size, something that results in far more film being used. To avoid this, the third rule is
overridden by the selection of "fixed scale". This means that the scale is always set as defined in the field
"HCU scale". However, the edges of the image will be cut off in this case!
Radiation beam axis An imaginary beam centered within the X-ray bundle. It runs from the focal spot to the middle of the
exposed area.
RIS Radiology Information System; central data input and management terminal in the radiology department.
ROI Region of interest
SID Source-image distance.
TDC Tomography Density Control
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Top position see Center position

UNIQUE Unified Image Quality Enhancement, software for processing digital medical images made with Philips sys-
tems.
11.2 Messages on the monitor

The following error messages may appear on the monitor. If a message
is not self-explanatory, please give Customer Service the number of the
message.
Message Cause Help
Error: Problems: Image not sent to the Printer error. Restart the system and printer.
HCU.
No Full Image: Cannot perform this opera- An exposure for this patient does not yet Select another patient or make an expo-
tion. exist. sure.
Connection to display tool lost! Program error. Restart the system.
Error: Image Not Loaded by the Display Program error. Restart the system.
Tool.
Cannot use the "ALL" function when other Wait or delete this job.
storage operations are incomplete.
Deleting Request of Acquisition <Acquis- Wait or delete this job.
tionNumber> Failed.
Retrieving Request of Acquisition <Acquis- Wait or delete this job.
tionNumber> Failed.

11.2 Messages on the monitor
Message Cause Help

Optical Disc media error The drive contains the wrong CD-R, poss. • Please use an empty CD or a CD with
a backup CD or a DVD. images if you wish to save this.
• Delete save jobs from the queue if no
longer required.
Storing Request of Acquisition <Acquis- The medium (opt. disk, network) is defec- Restart system and load opt. disk.
tionNumber> Failed. tive.
That Post Method Name already exists,
please choose another one.
You must provide a new Post Method
Name.
You cannot delete a standard post method.
The patient with this id exists but is not You have selected an invalid selection list Press "Search" and "Full list"
visible. Select the Full List and try again. for this patient.
This patient has jobs still pending, and so Wait
can not be deleted yet.
Two or more patients have this id! You At least two patients have the same patient Check whether patient numbers are cor-
must select this patient by hand. number so that automatic selection is not rect. Select patient, possibly using mouse.
possible.
There is no longer enough work space avail- The save jobs have not yet been completed. Delete jobs at external device or load a new
able on the disk to take anymore acquisi- The opt. disk is poss. not loaded or the net- opt. disk.
tions. Therefore new acquisitions have work is not ready.
been disabled until this situation is rem-
edied. If possible, by using the Status Bar,
delete any unwanted items from the HCU
or External device queues. Otherwise wait
until some of the prints or stores are com-
pleted.
Acquisitions cannot be taken on this pa- Patient data are unavailable for renewed Re-enter patient data.
tient. It is either a patient from archive, or exposure if you have
the examination is illegal. • reloaded them from the optical disk,
• select them after changing the configu-
ration.
Connection to viewing tool lost: VIEW now Program error. Restart the system.
unavailable.
VIEW aborted: patient has no acquisitions. An exposure for this patient does not yet Select another patient.
exist.
There is no longer enough space on the disk The save jobs have not yet been completed. Delete jobs at external device or load a new
to store any more images. You are no lon- The opt. disk is poss. not loaded or the net- storage medium.
ger able to take any further acquisitions, or work is not ready.
retrievals from archive, until more space
becomes available. You must wait for ex-
isting jobs to complete, or remove any un-

wanted jobs.
PatientDataEntry: Failed to connect session Program error. Restart the system.
to DB: <DataBase>.
Cannot Get Next Sequence Number! Program error. Restart the system.
Cannot Open Sequence! Program error. Restart the system.
Cannot change information. • Program error or Restart the system or re-enter patient data.
• You have reloaded the patient data
from the opt. disk.
Duplicated Identifier. Database error Re-enter patient data.

Messages in control grip display 11.3
Message Cause Help

A file has been rejected by the risConn The RIS has delivered incorrect patient da- Restart the RIS or call Customer Service
process, please call a service engineer. ta.
Please System ShutDown and RESTART as The system ran for more than 24hours Restart the system.
soon as is convenient. without restart.
Unexpected Death of System Process: Program error. Restart the system.
<ProcessName>.
Could not get process info from <Process- Program error. Restart the system.
Name>
Could not change priority of <Process- Program error. Restart the system.
Name> to <Pid>
StrtUpTool: Process (or group) <Process- Program error. Restart the system.
Name> <Pid> could not be interrupted
(Not detached?).
Time-out waiting for process( es) to die. Program error. Confirm window.
Process <ProcessName> could not be kil- Program error. Confirm window.
led.
Process <ProcessName> could not be kil- Program error. Shut down and restart system.
led.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
11.3 Messages in control grip display

Component Message Help
General This aux. is not available Choose another auxiliary
Grid was not released Error in the Bucky grid, reinsert cassette, if necessary call Cus-
tomer Service
Insert cassette again
The cassette is already exposed Insert unexposed cassette
SID too small Raise tube assembly
No Bucky servo Motorized drive of the image receptor carriage has failed, call
Customer Service
Insert cassette centric
Tracking Servo active
Wall stand tilted Set cassette tray to 0° or 90°
Tube not at 0° Set radiation beam axis vertically

Tube not at 90° Set radiation beam axis horizontally
SID too small Measure SID again, zoom, if necessary
CS at limit The tracking range of movement is smaller than the manual range
of movement; move column out of the boundary area.
Servo stand by Move tube assembly into the capture range
Press button again to servo Select auxiliary again
Servo off Select auxiliary

11.3 Messages in control grip display

No servo for this device
Servo not ready please wait
Servo active please wait
Tracking image receptor Maybe collision with Bucky tray Image receptor carriage is obstructed in continued running, re-
move obstruction
Bucky is moving please wait Wait until the end of the movement
Move CS over Bucky tray Move the tube assembly over the image receptor
Grid exposure CS trans not centered Move tube assembly to the image center
Press test for reference run System is not ready for tracking image receptor. Move tube as-
sembly and image receptor to center position
Invalid cassette Use a larger cassette size
Tomo defect
Check field size

Key-operated switch Restricted use Manual operation, call Customer Service
Wall Bucky Cassette still in the table Remove (second) cassette from the table
Bucky unit not at fixed position Position table top horizontally or vertically
Lock CS in long. direction Movement in the fixed mounted rails
Lock CS in trans. direction Movement in the ceiling susp. unit
No wall cassette Insert a cassette
Move CS over WS Move tube assembly centrally over the horizontal table top
Tomographic unit No exp. release from generator Release ready for exposure
Exposure aborted at the generator - You have let go of the exposure switch prematurely
- The monitoring system has switched off the exposure (chapter
4.15)
Press test for reference run Demonstrate the tomographic movement to the patient
Center ceiling suspension in long. di- Movement in the fixed mounted rails
rection
Center ceiling suspension in trans. di- Movement in the ceiling susp. unit
rection
Move tube ass. into SID Movement in the telescopic tube
Raise tube assembly Movement in the telescopic tube
Lower tube assembly Movement in the telescopic tube
Set tube assembly to 0° Movement around the horizontal axis

Lock CS arm hor. rotation Turn the tube assembly round the stand so that its longitudinal
axis points in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of
the table
Raise table top
Lower table top
Gen. preparation signalled
CS long is still unlocked Engage the floor stand in the longitudinal direction
Preparation tomo, please wait Lock CS in long. direction

Messages in generator control desk display 11.4

Tomo active in the other room
Aux. unit changed at the generator Wait until tomography is released; during tomography the auxili-
ary has been changed at the generator control desk; repeat expo-
sure
Table top brakes released During tomography the table top has been moved; repeat expo-
sure
Movement aborted at the generator
Bucky drive is defect Call Customer Service
Bucky table Cassette still in the wall stand Remove (second) cassette from wall Bucky
Automatic Bucky Insert grid APR program with grid selected
Remove grid APR program without grid selected
False APR set APR record does not match Bucky, call Customer Service
Combination tube as- Select aux. unit at the generator Control grip operates AUXs 1 ... 4
sembly with AUX 5...8
Manual operation with Measure SID man. Use tape measure
automatic cassette size
sensing
Automatic cassette size SID too small The film size used is not illuminated
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
sensing/NICOL
Enlarge long. collimation Pair of collimators longitudinally closed
Enlarge lat. field size Pair of collimators laterally closed
Limit coll-light use Allow the light field indicator to cool down
11.4 Messages in generator control desk display

Text Meaning Action
Door open The door to the examination room is not closed. Close door.
XXXX Press RESET This message appears if, for example, there are mains voltage fluc- Clear message:
tuations. The error code XXXX is intended for Customer Service. press RESET.
The generator is ready for operation.
03HJ Press RESET The focal spot selected has failed. You can proceed using a differ- Press RESET.
ent focal spot.
Press power on Initialization phase has been disrupted. Press again.
15LH During startup the footswitch has been pressed. Do not press the footswitch during
startup.

11.5 Screen-film combinations
11.5 Screen-film combinations

Philips suggests the following designations:
• G200ST
• U400SP
• B100HR
• G200+–
Meaning of the abbreviations:

• G: Green
• U: Ultraviolet
• B: Blue
• ST: Standard
• SP: Special
• HR: High resolution
• +–: Graduated intensifying screen
• 100 … 400: Absolute screen speed
If required the Customer Service can program different names (6 char-

acters max.).
11.6 If the system is not ready for exposure

• Check whether the display on the control grip shows READY and
follow the text displayed.
• Check whether a patient is selected.
• Check whether the right auxiliary is selected.
• Check whether an examination is selected.
• Check whether the patient data are loaded from the hard disk.
• Check whether the patient had a valid examination.
• Check whether the door to the examination room is open.
• Press "Reset" on the generator control desk.
• Restart the computer and generator.
• Call Customer Service.
11.7 Exposure table

Part of body Cassette size cm kV mAs SID SC Grid
[cm] [DIN]
Skull + trunk
Zygo. arch., Henkeltopf 18 by 24 20 73 8 110 200 +
Skull ap, pa 24 by 30 20 77 16 110 400 +
Skull lat. 24 by 30 16 73 8 110 400 +
Clementschisch/Towne 24 x 30 (18 x 24 land- 26 81 25 110 400 +

scape)
Schüller/Stenvers 13 by 18 24 77 25 110 400 +
Rheese/Orbita 13 by 18 19 73 16 110 400 +

Exposure table 11.7

[cm] [DIN]
Pyramis comparison 13 by 18 22 77 16 110 400 +
Skull axial 24 by 30 28 85 32 110 400 +
Paranasal sinuses semiaxial (13 x 18) 22 77 40 110 400
Nasal bone 13 by 18 3 44 2.5 110 200 +
Cervical spine ap 18 by 24 10 66 25 110 400 +
Cervical spine lat., obl. 18 by 24 12 73 25 110 400 +
Dorsal spine ap (+-) 20 x 40 (18 x 43) 21 77 25 110 400 +
Dorsal spine lat ((+-), (+-+) 20 x 40 (18 x 43) 32 81-85 40 110 400 +
Lumbar spine ap 20 x 40 (18 x 43) 22 77 25 110 400 +
Lumbar spine lat. (-+)/obl. 20 x 40 (18 x 43) 36 90-96 32 110 400 +
Sacrum lat. 20 x 40 (18 x 43) 28 90 40 110 400 +
Hip ap 24 by 30 20 77 20 110 400 +
Hip axial/Lauenstein 24 by 30 22 77 25 110 400 +
Al-/obturatum exp. 24 by 30 24 77 25 110 400 +

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Iliosacral joint 18 by 24 22 81 20 110 400 +
Pelvis ap 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 20 77-85 12.5 110 400 +
Thorax pa 35 x 35 (40 x 40) 18 125 2 180 400 +
Thorax lat. 35 x 35 (40 x 40) 26 125 3.2 180 200 +
Thorax recumbent (bed) 35 x 35 (40 x 40) 21 102 1 110 400
Ribs 1-7 30 x 40 (24 x 30) 16 66 20 110 400 +
Ribs 8-12 30 x 40 (24 x 30) 20 77 16 110 400 +
Upper extremities
Finger 13 by 18 1,5 46 2 110 200
Thumb 13 by 18 3 46 3.2 110 200
Hand ap 18 by 24 3 46 3.2 110 200
Hand (zither player) 18 by 24 4 48 3.2 110 200
Wrist ap 18 x 24 divid. in 2 5 48 4 110 200
Wrist lat. 18 x 24 divid. in 2 6 50 4 110 200

Navicular series ap./obl./lat. 24 x 30 or 18 x 24 divid. 6-7 50 3.2-5 110 200

in 4
Forearm + wrist ap 18 by 24 7 52 4 110 200
Forearm + wrist lat. 18 by 24 8 52 5 110 200
Forearm + elbow ap 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 8 55 4 110 200
Forearm + elbow lat. 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 9 55 5 110 200
Elbow ap 18 by 24 9 55 5 110 200
Elbow lat. 18 by 24 10 55 6.4 110 200

11.7 Exposure table

[cm] [DIN]
Humerus + elbow ap 24 x 30 divid. in 2 11 60 6.4 110 200
Humerus + elbow lat. 24 x 30 divid. in 2 12 60 6.4 110 200
Humerus + shoulder ap 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 13 66 10 110 200 +
Humerus + shoulder lat. 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 13 66 12 110 200 +
Shoulder ap 18 by 24 16 66 32 110 200 +
Shoulder axial 18 by 24 16 66 32 110 200 +
Shoulder transthoracal 18 by 24 26 85/90 25 110 200 +
Clavicle 18 by 24 14 66 10 110 200 +
Sternum lat. 24 by 30 42 85 8 110 200 +
Sternum obl. 24 by 30 21 77 16 110 200 +
Scapula ap 18 by 24 17 70 10 110 200 +
Lower extremities
Toes 18 x 24 (13 x 18) 2 46 2.5 110 200
Forefoot ap 18 by 24 3 48 2.5 110 200
Forefoot obl. 18 by 24 4 48 3.2 110 200
Foot ap 18 by 24 5 50 3.2 110 200
Foot obl. 18 by 24 6 50 5 110 200
Lower ankle ap 18 x 24 divid. in 2 9 55 5 110 200
Lower ankle obl. 18 x 24 divid. in 2 7 52 4 110 200
Ob. Ankle ap 18 x 24 divid. in 2 9 55 5 110 200
Ob. ankle obl. 18 x 24 divid. in 2 8 55 4 110 200
Calcaneum axial 18 x 24 divid. in 2 11 55 6.4 110 200
Calcaneum lat. 18 x 24 divid. in 2 8 52 4 110 200
Lower leg + upper ankle ap 20 by 40 9 57 4 110 200
Lower leg + upper ankle lat. 20 by 40 8 57 3.2 110 200
Lower leg + knee ap 20 by 40 11 60 5 110 200
Lower leg + knee lat. 20 by 40 10 60 4 110 200
Knee ap 18 x 24 divid. in 2 11 66 5 110 200 +

Knee lat. 18 x 24 divid. in 2 10 66 4 110 200 +
Patella axial + Défilé 13 x 18 divid. in 2 12 63 8 110 200
Frik 13 x 18 or 18 x 24 13 63 10 110 200

special cassette
Femur + knee ap/lat. 20 by 40 14 66 2 110 200 +
Femur + hip ap 20 by 40 16 73 20 110 400 +
Femur + hip lat. 20 by 40 16 73 25 110 400 +
Hip ap 24 by 30 20 77 20 110 400 +

Button symbols and their meaning 11.8

[cm] [DIN]
Hip Sven Johansson 24 by 30 20 81 10 110 400
Hip axial/Lauenstein 24 by 30 22 77 25 110 400 +
Pelvis ap 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 20 77-85 12.5 110 400 +
Inner organs
Esophagus 24 by 30 90 400 +
Stomach 35 by 35 102 400 +
Stomach detail 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 117 400 +
Small intestine (Sellink) 35 x 35 (24 x 30) 109 400 +
Colon 35 by 35 117 150 400 +
Colon 109 400 +
Colon detail 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 125 400 +
Abdomen 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 85 400 +
Abdomen side pos. 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 90-102 400 +
Kidney empty 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 77 400 +

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Kidneys + contrast medium 35 x 43 (30 x 40) 85 400 +
Kidneys detail 24 by 30 81 400 +
Ureter 20 x 40 (24 x 30) 77 400 +
Urethra 18 by 24 73 400 +
Bladder ap 18 by 24 77 400 +
Bladder lat. 18 by 24 90 400 +
Gallbladder empty 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 70 400 +
Gallbladder + contrast medium 24 x 30 (18 x 24) 77-85 400 +
Gallbladder detail 18 by 24 73 400 +
Phlebographies
Pelvis 35 x 35 divid. into 3 77 400 +
Femur 35 x 35 divid. into 3 73 400 +
Tibia 35 x 35 divid. into 3 66 400 +

11.8 Button symbols and their meaning

The symbols on the generator buttons can be exchanged by Customer
Service if required. The following symbols are available:
Horizontal radiographic device
Tiltable examination device with overtable cassette

11.8 Button symbols and their meaning
Angiography and Puck
Tiltable examination device with undertable tube assembly and cassette
Tomography unit
Fluoroscopy table with undertable tube assembly and image intensifier
Tiltable examination device with undertable tube assembly and image

intensifier
Spot-film device
Spot-film device, tomography
DSI
DSI, tomography
Display of vessels
Fluoroscopy
Bolus chase in lower extremities
Skull unit
Kymography
2
Free cassette, room 2
2
Vertical Bucky, room 2

Switching off the system – in a few words 11.9
11.9 Switching off the system – in a few words

system runs
System
STOP
Switch on again:
OFF state 1* Yes RES TART 1 min
enter
OFF state 2* LOGOUT user ID
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
SHUTDOWN
Yes
CONFIRM
wait for message

ÓIt is now save to
switch o ff the power Ò
enter
OFF state 3* OK
ÓbootÒ
5 min
switch o ff syste m
switch on
OFF state 4* and all auxiliaries
system
connected
* You can leave the system at any OFF state.
11.10 The hierarchy of levels on the display

There is more information than the display can give at a single level.
The information which is not visible is filed in three further levels and
can be displayed with . Each time you press the button you call up
the next level. After level 4, level 1 reappears. If, after an error message,
you have switched the generator off and back on again, you can call up

11.10 The hierarchy of levels on the display
this error message on level 4. The following table tells you where you
can find what information:
Exposure Fiel Display on Display on Display on Display on
techniques d1 level 1 level 2 level 3 level 4
With AEC 1 kV kV 2
Message
2 Density mAs or mA Message
correction (post-expo-
sure display)
3 Screen-film s Message
combina- (post-expo-
tion sure display)
kV-mAs 1 kV kV 2
Message
2 mAs mA Message
(calculated)
3 s 3
Message
kV-mAs-s 1 kV kV 2
Message
2 mAs mA Message
(calculated)
3 s 3
Message
kV-mA-s 1 kV kV 2
Message
2 mAs mAs Message
(calculated)
3 s 3
Message
TDC 1 kV kV Message
2 Density mAs or mA Message
correction (post-expo-
sure display)
3 Screen-film s (program- Message
combina- med)
tion
2
Total area of dose products (optional) in cGycm2 per examination
room and patient
3
The recommended screen-film combination is displayed. You cannot
change the value. Apart from the precalculated value you can set all the
values on the control desk.

Symbols for image processing 11.11
11.11 Symbols for image processing

Sym- Meaning
bol
Post-images are on the local hard disk.
Pre-image is on the local hard disk.

P
Post-images are on the storage medium.
The pre-image is on the storage medium.

P
The image has been exported to the printer.
The image has been saved.
The image has been discarded.

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Image confirmed by PACS via Storage Commit (optional).
11.12 The dose indicator

Definition (DIN V 6868-58)
The dose indicator is a manufacturer-specific value which is assigned by
the digital image receptor for every exposure. Under identical exposure
conditions this value correlates with the detector dose.
Thanks to image post-processing and autoranging digital acquisition
systems are considerably more flexible than conventional screen-film
systems in terms of exposures. While with conventional exposures in-
correct exposure directly affects the image, with digital systems there is
no direct connection between the dose and image density. With digital
systems it is therefore necessary to give a dose indicator that correlates
with the detector dose. The dose indicator for the DigitalDiagnost is
the Exposure Index (EI). It is in a reciprocal relationship with the
detector dose and is thus based on the sensitivity classes of the screen-
film systems.
For every exposure generated with the DigitalDiagnost the system cal-
culates an EI, without however this value describing the exposure in
detail.
The EI has the following meaning:
• It is used for quality assurance (e.g. consistency check)
• It provides information about the exposure

11.12 The dose indicator
• It provides for a comparison with the sensitivity classes of conven-

tional screen-film systems
• It possibly indicates
˗ malfunctioning automatic exposure control,
˗ selection of incorrect mAs and/or kV,
˗ incorrect collimation,
˗ incorrect positioning.
Calculation of EI
After X-ray exposition, information is always read out for the entire
detector area (3001 pixel x 3001 pixel). A mean value is calculated from
a histogram which is then used to determine the EI via a correction
factor. This correction factor takes into account the sensitivity of the
detector, which depends on the tube voltage.
The EIs between two exposures and/or between two patients may di-
verge from each other by up to 25% (R'10 scale).
Exposure
manual AEC
3
1 2 2
4
Histogram
Median x kV correction factor
EI
1 Quarter field
2 Detector
3 Active measuring chamber

4 Inactive measuring chamber
Automatic exposure control

With automatic exposure control the EI is calculated from the measur-
ing chamber data of the region of interest (ROI).
Free exposure
With free exposure the EI is calculated from the data in the center of

The dose indicator 11.12
the image (25% of image area, "quarter field"). When calculating the
mean value very light and collimated areas are not taken into account.
The R'10 scale
This results in the following table in which care is taken to ensure that
the corresponding EI values follow the R'10 scale exactly using suitable
rounding rules, i.e. 200, 250, 320, 400 with three intermediate values
per octave.
Detector signal EI dose indica- Dose [µGy] Dose [mR]
[LSB] tor = 1000/EI = dose 8.87
after the detec- R'10 scale with RQA5 [µGy]
tor-specific cor- with RQA5
rection
Greater 4 >200 >22.55
41400 5 200 22.55
32857 6.3 159 17.90
25875 8 125 14.09
20700 10 100 11.27
16560 12.5 80 9.02
12938 16 63 7.05
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
10350 20 50 5.64
8280 25 40 4.51
6469 32 31 3.52
5175 40 25 2.82
4140 50 20 2.25
3286 63 16 1.79
2588 80 12.5 1.41
2970 100 10 1.13
1656 125 8 0.90
1294 169 6.3 0.70
1035 200 5 0.56
828 250 4 0.45
647 320 3.1 0.35
518 400 2.5 0.28
414 500 2 0.23

329 630 1.6 0.18
259 800 1.3 0.14
207 1000 1 0.11
166 1250 0.8 0.09
129 1600 0.6 0.07
104 2000 0.5 0.06
Smaller 2500 <0.5

11.13 Energy characteristic
11.13 Energy characteristic

The relative energy absorption was calculated for the radiation qualities
according to IEC 61267 for a CsI layer 400 μm thick.
Radiation qualities according to IEC 61267
RQA2 RQA3 RQA4 RQA5 RQA6 RQA7 RQA8 RQA9 RQA10
1. HVL 2.4 4 5.7 7.1 8.4 9.1 9.9 11.5 12.8
Al added filter [mm] 1
4 10 16 21 26 30 34 40 45
Tube voltage [kV]2 43.2 52.9 64.1 73.8 83.6 89.1 97.2 119.2 140.2
Rel. energy absorption 81.1 79.2 71.7 63.9 56.6 52.8 48.2 38.6 31.5
[%]
1
Inherent filter 2.5 mm Al
2
Voltage values which result in the specified HVLs calculated in com-
bination with the specified Al added filters.
Rel. energy absorption with the radiation qualities according to
IEC 61267 for CsI 400 μm
Rel.
energy
absorption [%]
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 Tube

voltage
[kV]
11.14 Reproduction scale

The scale in % given on the film relates to the detector level (100%).
Calibration takes place in the so-called Scale Calibration Procedure ac-
cording to the relevant configuration of DigitalDiagnost and the laser
printer.

Erasure 11.15
11.15 Erasure
In acceptance mode under test item No. 20 Field: Visual Erasure
Test two exposures are made one after the other with a different dose
and field size.
• 1st image 70kV / 21mmAl / sm. focus / 30 x 30 / 62.5 mAs
• 60 s pause
• 2nd image 70kV / 21mmAl / sm. focus / 43 x 43 / 5 mAs
The 2nd image is examined visually for remaining structures of the 1st
image. Visible differences in density must lie below an optical density
difference of 0.1.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

11.15 Erasure

Contents
12 Accessories .................................................... 12-5
12.1 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT ............. 12-5

12.1.1 Normal use ....................................................... 12-5
12.1.2 Prohibited use ................................................... 12-5
12.1.3 Legend .............................................................. 12-6
12.1.4 Installing ........................................................... 12-6
12.1.5 Dismantling ...................................................... 12-7
12.1.6 Inserting and positioning a cassette ................... 12-9
12.1.8 Technical data ................................................ 12-10
12.1.9 Compatibility ................................................. 12-10
12.1.10 Labels ............................................................. 12-11
12.2 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS .................. 12-11
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12.2.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-11

12.2.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-11
12.2.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-12
12.2.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-12
12.2.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-13
12.2.6 Inserting and positioning a cassette ................. 12-15
12.2.8 Technical data ................................................ 12-16
12.2.9 Compatibility ................................................. 12-16
12.2.10 Labels ............................................................. 12-17
12.3 Long cassette holder ...................................................... 12-17
12.3.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-17
12.3.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-17
12.3.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-18
12.3.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-18
12.3.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-19
12.3.6 Inserting a cassette .......................................... 12-20
12.3.8 Technical data ................................................ 12-21
12.3.9 Compatibility ................................................. 12-21
12.3.10 Labels ............................................................. 12-21

12.4 Handrail ........................................................................ 12-22
12.4.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-22
12.4.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-22
12.4.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-22
12.4.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-22
12.4.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-23
12.4.6 Technical data ................................................ 12-23
12.4.7 Compatibility ................................................. 12-23
12.4.8 Labels ............................................................. 12-23

Contents
12.5 Fixing aid ...................................................................... 12-24

12.5.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-24
12.5.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-24
12.5.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-24
12.5.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-25
12.5.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-25
12.5.6 Operation ....................................................... 12-25
12.5.7 Technical data ................................................ 12-25
12.5.8 Compatibility ................................................. 12-25
12.5.9 Labels ............................................................. 12-26
12.6 Infusion bottle holder .................................................... 12-26
12.6.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-26
12.6.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-26
12.6.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-27
12.6.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-27
12.6.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-27
12.6.6 Technical data ................................................ 12-28
12.6.7 Compatibility ................................................. 12-28
12.6.8 Labels ............................................................. 12-28
12.7 Paper roll holder ............................................................ 12-28
12.7.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-28
12.7.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-28
12.7.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-29
12.7.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-29
12.7.5 Dismantling .................................................... 12-30
12.7.6 Technical data ................................................ 12-30
12.7.7 Compatibility ................................................. 12-30
12.7.8 Labels ............................................................. 12-30
12.8 Stretch grip for BuckyDiagnost VS basic ....................... 12-31
12.8.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-31
12.8.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-31
12.8.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-31
12.8.4 Operating ....................................................... 12-32
12.8.5 Technical data ................................................ 12-32
12.8.6 Compatibility ................................................. 12-32
12.8.7 Labels ............................................................. 12-32
....................................................................................... 12-33
12.9.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-33
12.9.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-33
12.9.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-33
12.9.4 Operating ....................................................... 12-34

12.9.5 Technical data ................................................ 12-34
12.9.6 Compatibility ................................................. 12-34
12.9.7 Labels ............................................................. 12-35
12.10 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS .............................. 12-35
12.10.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-35
12.10.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-35
12.10.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-36
12.10.4 Installing ......................................................... 12-36
12.10.5 Operating ....................................................... 12-37
12.10.6 Technical data ................................................ 12-37

Contents
12.10.7 Compatibility ................................................. 12-37

12.10.8 Labels ............................................................. 12-38
12.11 Table top support .......................................................... 12-38
12.11.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-38
12.11.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-38
12.11.3 Legend ............................................................ 12-39
12.11.4 Operating ....................................................... 12-39
12.11.5 Technical data ................................................ 12-39
12.11.6 Compatibility ................................................. 12-40
12.11.7 Labels ............................................................. 12-40
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

Contents

12 Accessories
12.1 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT
12.1.1 Normal use

This cassette holder is hung in front of the front panel of the COSMOS
BS or the wall Bucky BuckyDiagnost VE/VT. A grid is not necessary
for pediatric exposures.
12.1.2 Prohibited use

You must not use this cassette holder
• with a front-mounted anti-scatter grid
• on devices other than those stated above.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Accessories 12-5

12.1.3 Legend
1 2 1
7
8
No. Meaning
1 Arm for fitting into the rails
2 Chin rest
3 Top cassette carrier
4 Bottom cassette carrier
5 Lever for releasing the bottom cassette carrier
6 Holding rail; prevents lifting and falling out
7
8 Disengage suction cup

12.1.4 Installing
Risk of collision
▪ Ensure that the cassette holder is configured to your BuckyDiagnost VE/VT
according to the accompanying installation manual.
WARNING
▪ When the cassette holder is in place the BuckyDiagnost VE/VT is no longer
counterbalanced.
12-6 Accessories DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT 12.1
1 2
3
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12.1.5 Dismantling
▶ Remove cassette if necessary.

1 2
Re 1.:
Press button "Disengage suction cup" and lift the cassette holder away
from the front panel at the same time.

Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT 12.1
12.1.6 Inserting and positioning a cassette

1 2
3 4
5 6
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en

12.1.7 Removing a cassette

1 2
3 4
12.1.8 Technical data

Height 52 cm
Width ≤73 cm
Weight 4.2 kg
Cassette sizes Standard cassettes from 18 cm x 24 cm
(portrait) to 35 cm x 43 cm
Service life 300000 exposures or 10 years
• Cosmos BS

Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS 12.2
12.1.10 Labels

1 (A) (B) A Logo
(C) (D)
B Address
C Type number
D CE
12.2 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VS

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12.2.1 Normal use

This cassette holder is hung in front of the front panel of the wall Bucky
BuckyDiagnost VS (advanced package). A grid is not necessary for pe-
diatric exposures.

• on devices other than those stated above.

12.2.3 Legend
1 2 1
7
8
No. Meaning
2 Chin rest
3 Top cassette carrier
4 Bottom cassette carrier
5 Lever for releasing the bottom cassette carrier
6 Holding rail; prevents lifting and falling out
7
8 Disengage suction cup

12.2.4 Installing
Risk of collision
▪ Ensure that the cassette holder is configured to your BuckyDiagnost VS ac-
cording to the accompanying installation manual.
WARNING
▪ When the cassette holder is in place the BuckyDiagnost VS is no longer coun-
terbalanced.

1 2
3
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12.2.5 Dismantling

1 2
Re 1.:

12.2.6 Inserting and positioning a cassette

1 2
3 4
5 6
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en


1 2
3 4

Height 52 cm
Width ≤73 cm
Weight 4.2 kg
Cassette sizes Standard cassettes from 18 cm x 24 cm
(portrait) to 35 cm x 43 cm

Long cassette holder 12.3
12.2.10 Labels

1 (A) (B) A Logo
(C) (D)
B Address
C Type number
D CE
12.3 Long cassette holder

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12.3.1 Normal use

This cassette holder is hung in front of the front panel of the wall Bucky
BuckyDiagnost VE/VT.

• on motorized stands, as there is a danger of it falling off if the unit
runs into an obstacle
• on devices other than those stated above
• with the triple cassette from Fuji.

12.3.3 Legend
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
No. Meaning
1 Top cassette stop
3
4 Bottom cassette stop
12.3.4 Installing
Risk of collision
▪ Ensure that the cassette holder is configured to your BuckyDiagnost VE/VT
according to the accompanying installation manual.
WARNING
▪ When the cassette holder is in place the BuckyDiagnost VE/VT is no longer
counterbalanced.

1 2
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
3
12.3.5 Dismantling

1 2
Re 1.:
12.3.6 Inserting a cassette

1 2


1 2

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Height 86 cm
Width 63 cm … 74 cm
Weight 2.4 kg
Cassette sizes 20 cm x 96 cm*
(* = standard) 30 cm x 90 cm*
30 cm x 120 cm*
35 cm x 90 cm
335 cm x 107 cm
35 cm x 129 cm
12.3.10 Labels

1 (A) (B) A Logo
(C) (D)
B Address
C Type number
D CE

12.4 Handrail
12.4 Handrail
12.4.1 Normal use

The handrail
• ensures safe patient positioning,
• protects him from falling off,
• helps the patient change position.

The handrail is not a suitable aid for getting on the table.
12.4.3 Legend
2 1 2
4 4
3 3
No. Meaning
1 Grip
2 Knob for fixing/release
3 Locking lever
4 Table clamp
Top view
12.4.4 Installing
1 2
3 4

Handrail 12.4
Re 1:
Unscrew knob fully.
Re 2:
Position handrail from underneath at an angle and then pull up. If not
properly arrested, the handrail may release and injure patients and per-
sonnel.
Re 3:
Turn the knob until it no longer engages.
12.4.5 Dismantling
1 2

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Length 750 mm
Weight 1.9 kg
Max. load
- horizontal 20 kg
- vertical 112.5 kg
• DigitalDiagnost TH-S
• DigitalDiagnost TF-M
• Height Adjustable Trolley TA-M
12.4.8 Labels

1 (A) (B) A Logo
(C) (D)
B Address
C Type number
D CE

12.5 Fixing aid
12.5 Fixing aid
12.5.1 Normal use

The fixing aid is suitable for
• immobilizing the patient for radiography,
• securing the patient in a safe position.
The belts are closed with hook-and-loop tape (Velcro).

Since the patient is capable of loosening the fixing aid, you must con-
tinue to watch him even after you have secured the tape.

The fixing aid is not suitable
• for getting on the table.
• for "strapping down" patients.
12.5.3 Legend
2 1 2
3 3
No. Meaning
1 Belt
2 Belt clip, closed by spring tension
3 Holder for belt clip
Side view

Fixing aid 12.5
12.5.4 Installing
1 2
Re 2:
Position table clamp from underneath at an angle and then pull up. If
not properly arrested, the table clamp may release and injure patients
and personnel.
12.5.5 Dismantling
1 2
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12.5.6 Operation
▶ Tension two halves of belt over patient and press Velcro tapes
together.

Length
- max. 1280 mm
- min. 720 mm
Width 73 mm
Weight 1.25 kg
Max. load 30 kg

12.6 Infusion bottle holder
12.5.9 Labels

1 (A) (B) A Logo
(C) (D)
B Address
C Type number
D CE
12.6 Infusion bottle holder
12.6.1 Normal use

The infusion bottle holder is suitable for installing the infusion bottle
on the floating table top.

The infusion bottle holder is not a suitable aid for getting on the table.

Infusion bottle holder 12.6
12.6.3 Legend
1 1
No. Meaning
1 Eyelets
2 Rod
3 Table clamp
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12.6.4 Installing
1 2
Re 1:
Unscrew knob fully.
Re 2:
and personnel.
Re 3:
12.6.5 Dismantling
1 2

12.7 Paper roll holder

Height above table top approx. 860 mm
Weight 1.8 kg
12.6.8 Labels

1 (A) (B) A Logo
(C) (D)
B Address
C Type number
D CE
12.7.1 Normal use

The paper roll holder is suitable for holding the roll of paper. For reasons
of hygiene the paper is pulled over the table/mattress.

The paper roll holder is not a suitable aid for getting on the table.

Paper roll holder 12.7
12.7.3 Legend
No. Meaning
1 Table clamps
2 Rod
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
Top view
12.7.4 Installing
Risk of injury
Only install the paper roll holder at the radiolucent end of the table top. Other-
wise
DANGER
▪ a collision/injury to the patient and operator may occur when moving the
table top,
▪ the range of movement and the radiolucent area will be restricted.
1 2
3 4

Re 1:
Unscrew knob fully.
Re 2:
and personnel.
Re 3:
12.7.5 Dismantling
1 2

Width 75 cm
Weight 3.1 kg
For rolls of paper - up to 70 cm wide
- up to 8 kg
12.7.8 Labels

Stretch grip for BuckyDiagnost VS basic 12.8

1 (A) (B) A Logo
(C) (D)
B Address
C Type number
D CE
12.8 Stretch grip for BuckyDiagnost VS basic
12.8.1 Normal use

The stretch grip is suitable for supporting the patient in the correct
seated or standing position at the BuckyDiagnost VS basic.
Max. load: 66.14 lb

The stretch grip must not be used as an aid for getting on the table or
subjected to a load of more than 30 kg.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12.8.3 Legend
1 2
No. Meaning
1 Lever for unlocking/locking
2 Stretch grip

12.8 Stretch grip for BuckyDiagnost VS basic
12.8.4 Operating
1.
2.
Swivel the stretch grip back before raising/lowering the detector.

Max. load 30 kg
• BuckyDiagnost VS basic
12.8.7 Labels

1 (A) (B) A CE
(C) (D)
B Address
C Type number
D Code

Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4 12.9
12.9 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with

ACL4
12.9.1 Normal use

The Babix holder
• is only designed for use on the BuckyDiagnost VE/VT with ACL4,
• is for attaching the Babix baby bucket for examining small children
and
• is only swiveled in front of the cover plate of the Bucky for the du-
ration of the examination.

The Babix holder is not suitable for use as a stretch grip.
12.9.3 Legend
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
2 3
No. Meaning
1 Holding arm
2 Column
3 Suspension

12.9.4 Operating
▶ Swivel the holding arm in front of the cover plate of the Bucky.
▶ Put the child into a Babix baby bucket suitable for his/her size
and secure.
▶ Hang the Babix baby bucket with the child in it from the sus-
pension hook.
▶ Align the Babix baby bucket for the exposure.
▶ After the exposure remove the Babix baby bucket and take the
child out.

Max. load 10 kg
• Babix baby buckets

Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS 12.10
12.9.7 Labels
2
1

1 Type number
2 Max. load
12.10 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS

4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12.10.1 Normal use

The Babix holder
• is only designed for use with the BuckyDiagnost VS,
• is for attaching the Babix baby bucket for examining small children
and
• is only swiveled in front of the cover plate of the Bucky for the du-
ration of the examination.

The Babix holder is not suitable for use as a stretch grip.

12.10 Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS
12.10.3 Legend
1
2
3
4
No. Meaning
1 Babix holder
2 Holding arm
3 Column
4 Suspension
12.10.4 Installing
Customer Service
• mounts the Babix holder at the desired height
• sets the Babix holder to the necessary length.

Babix holder for BuckyDiagnost VS 12.10
12.10.5 Operating
▶ Attach the holder to the fixture.
1.
2.
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
▶ Lift holder and insert as far as the stop (1).

▶ Lower holder to the horizontal position (2).
The green indicators signal that the holder has been correctly
inserted.
▶ Put the child into a Babix baby bucket suitable for his/her size
and secure.
▶ Hang the Babix baby bucket with the child in it from the sus-
pension hook.
▶ After the exposure remove the Babix baby bucket and take the
child out.

Max. load 10 kg
• BuckyDiagnost VS
• Babix baby buckets

12.11 Table top support
12.10.8 Labels

1 (A) (B) A Logo
(C) (D)
B Address
C Type number
D CE
12.11.1 Normal use

The table top support is designed to support the table top during the
resuscitation of a patient. It must be installed in a central position under
the table top.

The table top support must not support the table top anywhere but in
the middle.

Table top support 12.11
12.11.3 Legend
No. Meaning
1 Telescopic rod
2 Knob
3 Foot
4512 987 12131 AA/712 * 2006-11 en
12.11.4 Operating
Install support
▶ Release knob.
▶ Push down telescopic rod.
▶ Position the support so it is more or less leveled with the middle
of the patient's body under the table top.
▶ Pull out the telescopic rod as far as the table top.
▶ Tighten knob.
Dismantle support
▶ Release knob.
▶ Push down telescopic rod.
▶ Remove support from under table top.

Weight 4 kg

12.11.7 Labels
1+2

1 Warning
2 Type number

4512-987-12131aa - OM Digital v1.5 EN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4512-987-12131aa - OM Digital v1.5 EN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

English

Instructions for Use

4512 987 12131 – en

4512 987 12131 – en

4512 987 12131 – en

DigitalDiagnost system Version 1.5

DigitalDiagnost system Version 1.5

Germany To the maximum extent permitted by law, you shall

1 Useful information .......................................... 1-3

1.1 Release ............................................................................... 1-3

2 Safety ................................................................ 2-3

2.1 About these Instructions for Use ........................................ 2-3

2.3 Fire safety .......................................................................... 2-3

3 What is DigitalDiagnost? ................................ 3-3

4 Functions .......................................................... 4-3

4.1 Automatic collimation ....................................................... 4-3

DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Contents 0-5

4.7 Tracking for the SID (optional) ......................................... 4-4

5 Legend .............................................................. 5-3

5.1 The system ........................................................................ 5-3

6 The screen layouts .......................................... 6-3

0-6 Contents DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

6.5 Examination list ................................................................ 6-9

6.21 Displaying image + menu ................................................ 6-39

7 Operation ........................................................ 7-5

7.1 The system ........................................................................ 7-5

DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Contents 0-7

7.1.8 Selecting tube assembly ..................................... 7-11

7.6.1 Operation of all configurations ......................... 7-88

0-8 Contents DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

7.7.3 Changing a cassette ......................................... 7-113

7.11.3 Adjusting SID and collimating with Bucky

7.14.2 Inserting table top ........................................... 7-153

DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Contents 0-9

7.16.2 Reading out image plate ................................. 7-165

8 Maintenance .................................................... 8-3

8.1 Obligations of the user ...................................................... 8-3

9 Maintenance .................................................... 9-3

9.1 Repairs .............................................................................. 9-3

10 Technical data ............................................... 10-3

10.1 System ............................................................................. 10-3

10.2.1 Equipment data ................................................ 10-3

0-10 Contents DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

10.4 BuckyDiagnost VS ........................................................ 10-11

10.8.1 Equipment data .............................................. 10-23

10.13.2 Labels ............................................................. 10-31

DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Contents 0-11

11 Annex ............................................................. 11-3

11.1 Glossary of terms ............................................................. 11-3

12 Accessories .................................................... 12-5

12.1 Short cassette holder for BuckyDiagnost VE/VT ............. 12-5

12.2.1 Normal use ..................................................... 12-11

0-12 Contents DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

12.3 Long cassette holder ...................................................... 12-17

12.5.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-24

12.7.2 Prohibited use ................................................. 12-28

DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Contents 0-13

12.8.4 Operating ....................................................... 12-32

Philips Medical Systems, November 2006

0-14 Contents DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5

1 Useful information .......................................... 1-3

1.1 Release ............................................................................... 1-3

DigitalDiagnost system Ver. 1.5 Contents 1-1

Philips Medical Systems, November 2006